Home

4 - Varec, Inc.

1. ler E i Unit AC Power terminal block J3 AC Power fuse E T M 500 mA 250V 5x20 mm F1 F4 EOS AC Power selection jumpers a 120 220 VAC 05 5 un 7 Og OO 8 3 D 0 i Field 24 VDC fuse 2 250V F2 mi D S g Assembly 012259 ov 00 Unit 24 VDC fuse 9 p I E 2A 250V TRS F3 OOo OO OO PE i 1 zii gt g EE Bn E 82 8 md c Coo T SS I D IO 0000 a H o OQ Inl Figure 4 2 Motherboard Power Supply Components Power Supply Field voltage adjustment pot R101 DC Input Output Power terminal block J2 Unit AC Power terminal block J3 Unit 24 VDC fuse 2A 250V TR5 Field 24 VDC fuse 2A 250V TR5 F2 AC Power fuse 500 mA 250V 5x20 mm F1 F4 AC Power selection jumpers 120 220 VAC Field Voltage adjustment pot R101 The field voltage is one of two power supplies found in the power supply subsystem This component is used for setting and calibr
2. S Figure 2 1 8130 RTU Motherboard Varec Inc Hardware and Software Hardware Block Diagram A 8130 RTU hardware functional block diagram is shown below This diagram shows the relationship between major subsystems and components in the 8130 RTU WD RESET gt 2k RAM FEDS I O EXP 4 ADDR SWITCH VO 32k PROM P1 P4 PUSHBUTTONS ae VO CS4 7 u eripnera LOCAL MUX NOVRAM 32k 256k l O CSO 3 2k RAM A D MUX 32k PROM De us 32k 256k HART CEK uP Peripheral Temp A D Field Current INT CTRL Unit Current uP es SERIAL 3 SERIAL gt 68 COM1 SYSCLeCK VA comm PS 232 RS 485 NE gt J7 J10 COM2 RS 232 Serial Communications Controller J4 P2 P1 P4 5 COMS COMO Figure 2 2 8130 RTU Functional Block Diagram The heart of the 8130 RTU is an Intel 80C188EB microprocessor operating at 18 432 MHz Designed specifically for real time embedded applications the uP includes timer counters an interrupt controller and chip select circuitry It also includes 2 serial channels that are designated as COMO and COM3 A separate serial communications controller is used for COMI and COM2 Microprocessor peripherals assist in performing on board 1 functions as well as providing RAM and PROM The Boot system is resident in PROM of the uP peri
3. 127 Parameters cix seme re bi ber reds he 4g he ue ix e Yd wed is 127 PIPER 128 Rosemount RAPTOR RTG RAPTOR 129 Parameters a a ee ER ea eed eh tee a RO ga 129 Saab REX Radar Tank Gauge REX 133 Parameters i i kk hk era ea eee bee kee ci 133 Application RR CR tet f 135 Micropilot Interface 7000 137 Parameters ta aie dE ILLUD eL VL ch se Lu REIR SIS 137 pP 138 Saab Radar Tank Gauge RTG 139 Parameters uses alate UI en RARI UR ENSE e NUR dL Pa we qs dI alien ans 139 Application i ra utum reme Rum exa ERR ea Yet c e AU ee Re RU 141 Varec 6000 Servo Gauge 566000 143 Parameters oes s eee E Rd einen ect ale fu 143 AppliCatiohi e dre eR gx E eee ge a e Ea 147 Varec 4590 Tank Side Monitor TM4590 149 Parameters use dece Lut ek ERU RIS epe Ei a UR pea VADE e Rub Us 149 Applications 2 2er ome ete dev dee gern ER Bas Res 151 Ronan X76CTM X76CTM ssssssssee eh 153 ParameterS 4 5 c hen ESRIGO bee d due e Ru RS 153 viii Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit 10 Application uu ae m kl RR Pa
4. 100 e Reset push button RESET SW2 n bs QQ oB H power 7 Of Assembly 012259 9 o Rev 140795 II Unit ID DIP Switch SW1 9 fy x O O O I il ER Sod ees D eco 3 3 So Soe D MESILE AN IO Ds B BH 10 Figure 4 7 Switches and Indicators Components on the 8130 RTU Motherboard Hard Reset A special form of Reset is available for occasions when the battery backed up data base must be re initialized This type of reset the Hard Reset can be performed before a database is downloaded from a host PC Caution The Hard Reset should be used as a last resort if the 8130 RTU is not functioning A Hard reset clears the installed database For the Hard Reset procedure refer to the Troubleshooting and Calibration chapter Unit ID DIP Switch SW1 The DIP switch is used for setting the 8130 RTU Unit Address which is used in Host 8130 RTU communications The Unit Address is a binary value with switch 8 as the Least Significant Bit LSB 26 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit ON OFF Figure 4 8 8130 RTU DIP Switch Setting Showing a Value of 7 Intrusion Alarm Connections terminal J1 This terminal is used to connect to a switch on the 8130 RTU enclosure door The door switch or Intrusion Detection Alarm is composed of a set of contacts conne
5. Level IEEE Floating point value representing the corrected tank level The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Status Hart Command 48 Status Refer to manufacturer for additional information Level Floating point value representing the uncorrected tank level Ullage Measured Distance Distance from radar to product CustodyMode Weights amp Measures Status MediaType Dielectric constant DC of the product Device Status TM4590 Internal Status Elapse Time of last scan Interval Amount of time in HR MIN SEC between scans of the gauge PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response from Device 0x1000 W amp M Seal is enabled 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8203 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8203 has stopped updating PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMChecksum Weights amp Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMsSeal parameter is set to Enable Application The Micropilot Radar RG7000 point must communicate via a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 All communication parameters such as ID Module Chan BaudRate etc must be set to communicate to the TM4590 Once communication is established through the TM4590 the RG7000 point then automatically retrieves all data Modbus Protoc
6. 16 Grounding or esa sehr Ren Be aa ERR ORT RR Sead nca EG n Rn a 16 Installing 5 17 Configuring I O Expansion Modules 18 Varec Inc Recommended Maintenance Procedure 18 4 Configuration esu bebes taces sd 21 Motherboard Description isori 21 Power Supply ERR RAE RR Ra TL Rims 23 MOVs and Gas TubeS iet d ei ie K aaka Da a oaee a aada 25 Switches and Indicators llli ees 25 COMMUNICATIONS ss freind vic t Ed eden roa M Np dd RM alee e qox 28 8130 Communications Cable 30 5 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface 31 shee uenia Mt musti a iege d ded Acci ER 31 Description audere ital ae ease Bp pepe ede f e etes ede ee e ees 31 ID DIP Switch GT o Fax Soeur ed ed aque 32 LED Indicators 1 4 33 Field wiring terminal block 24 33 Surge Shield Ground Connector 3 34 Network terminating resistor jumpers W4 amp 5 34 Hardware Interface ctu we dine ix de xoa do es 34 M
7. 209 Adding A Points 3 Lou sc OL s DOM e edu 210 Deleting a Point 210 Editing a Point LEER Pete A Que ERE dies wee rely af 211 Listing POMS bur he xerox reote Ru Race epum 212 mo NE PET TTE 212 Update Mode o ede earn Slee Lie ue Rr RE rte EUR dle ae 213 Configuring Update Mode 213 Viewing Update 215 Tank ELA iege emu bre 215 Troubleshoollliq 2 oir RARE REC SUE S 217 Troubleshooting the 8130 Motherboard 217 LED Displays Under Normal Conditions 217 LED Displays Under Abnormal 5 218 Using the 8130 RTU icons 0 0c nh 219 Performing a Hard 1 219 8130 RTU Motherboard Power Adjustments and Verification 220 Power Supply Adjustment 220 Supply Voltage 220 Order Codes soeur irc Sedo ipa oec dpa ond 223 8130 Remote Terminal UNT istenen t nanie aE RRRA nee 223 Ordering Structure 8130 RTU NEMA 4 Enclosure for use in Class Div 2 areas 223 Ordering Structure Miscellaneous 5 223 Ordering
8. Al 12 Value E 05 0 NMS53 05 Level ALDB Value Al 13 Value oul 06 0 NMS53 06 Level ALO7 Value Al 14 Value Ip u z rawk o 0 NMS53 07 Level Al 08 Value Al 15 Value xi Figure 8 31 Spreadsheet Mode Window Note Refer to the following Entering Point Data section for a description of the Spread sheet Mode window 122 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Entering Point Data This section explains the window used to configure multiple points of a single point type When the user double clicks on a point type the following example dialog box appears C SPREADSHEET MODE x Point Edit Options p E Tag Mode LevelRef TempRef WaterRei 00 0 NMS53 00 Level Al 00 Value Al 01 Value TANK 01 0 NMS53 01 Level AI 02 Value Al 09 Value TANK 02 0 NMS53 02 Level Al 03 Value Al 10 Value TANK 03 NMS53 03 Level Al 04 Value Al 11 Value 04 0 553 04 1 Al 05 Value Al 12 Value 05 0 NMS53 05 Level Al 06 Value Al 13 Value 06 0 553 06 1 Al 07 Value Al 14 Value 07 0 NMS53 07 Level Al 08 Value Al 15 Value an ar Figure 8 32 Spreadsheet Mode Entering Point Parameter Data Spreadsheet Mode This window displays a list of all the point numbers of a selected point type The user is able to add configure and edit points The user is able to select and enter the parameters
9. DetectTime The time the last alarm state occurred PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The AAL point continually monitors the value of the PntRef and then places the data in the RefValue parameter The RefValue is then compared to the LoLo Low High and HiHi parameters The Value parameter is set according to the following criteria RefValue Value RefValue lt LoLo LowLow LoLo gt RefValue lt Low Low Low RefValue High Normal High gt RefValue HiHi High RefValue gt HiHi HighHigh The HoldOff is used to determine if an alarm state will occur When the RefValue first exceeds the alarm limit a timer is initiated If the RefValue returns to the normal range before the timer expires the alarm is held off If the RefValue remains in the alarm range for a period greater than the HoldOff value the alarm state is then set to the appropriate alarm status Note To disable the alarm holdoff set the Holdoff value to 00 00 00 The Hysteresis is used to determine when the Value in alarm status is returned to Normal status In order for the Value to return to Normal or
10. 120 VAC O 240 VAC d 240 VAC d 120 VAC 120 Configuration 240 Configuration Figure 4 6 120 240 VAC Configurations MOVs and Gas Tubes When changing an 8130 RTU from 120 VAC to 240 VAC or vice versa the surge protection components MOVs 2102 2104 and Gas Tubes GT101 amp GT102 must be changed to match the input voltage Switches and Indicators Note Troubleshooting methods using switches and indicators are discussed in the Trou bleshooting chapter of this manual Reset push button RESET SW2 Unit ID DIP Switch SW1 Intrusion Alarm Connections terminal INTRUSION J1 LED indicators Reset push button SW2 The RESET Switch is used to re initialize the system hardware by causing it to go to a known starting state This switch may be pressed at any time however it will do the following Re initialize System Hardware Clear Scratch Memory Verify Database and Re initialize if Invalid Varec Inc 25 Configuration Reset All Timers and Schedules Enable Communications Intrusion Alarm Connections terminal INTRUSION J1 LED indicators
11. Amount of time in HR MIN SEC between scans of the gauge 96 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 Gauge is offline 0x0002 Data is invalid 0x0004 Command Timeout 0x8000 Gauge did not response to last request pre fail PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMCheckSum Weights and Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMSeal parameter is set to enable Application The temperature transmitter AT45 30 point must communicate via a SG6000 Servo Tank Gauge or a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 All communication parameters such as ID Module Chan BaudRate etc must be set to communicate to the Servo or TM4590 Once communication is established through the Servo or TM4590 the AT4530 point then automatically retrieves all data The AT4530 point can operate using one of three protocols V1 Protocol Using V1 Protocol Prothermo temperature transmitters are connected to a SG6000 Servo tank gauge or a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 The Servo or TM4590 is connected to a Model 8213 V1 Interface Module The Model 8213 is automatically detected at startup and a VISCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8213 will be used and to which chann
12. Remote Terminal Unit In order to communicate with a gauge the ID Chan and Module have to be assigned values The ID is the MG5000 gauge address Valid values for the DDA ID are OxCO OxFF Valid values for the Modbus ID are 0x01 to OxF7 The Chan parameter refers to which channel of the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module or 8130 RTU the MG5000 is connected Valid values for the Chan are 1 2 The Module parameter refers to Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module or to which the MG5000 is connected Valid values for the Module are 1 4 for a Model 8203 Varec Inc 121 122 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Modbus Integer Register MIREG The Modbus Integer Register point is used to scan Modbus compatible slave devices MOO user can scan up to four blocks of data allowing access to a total of 64 register values When the Protocol parameter of a COM point is set to Modbus Master the MIREG point is used to read Integer values The MIREG point executes on either the 8130 RTU Motherboard or on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module MODx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MIREG point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Modbus Slave or Regi
13. 3804 weg SNISIM TWNOIS 5 WOIdAL 7 1300W NOIL2JNNOO GNNOYD 0131 5 SI TVNIAH31 H31N3O 1 NOILVAYOSNI IVNOLLIQOV WANVA 3ONVNGINIVIA SNOILVH3dO NLYOSLS 5310435 Ol N3438 NOILVOO LNSWNYLSNI SHL 1v Q31VInSNI Q3avi 38 GINOHS NIXIM QT13IHS IVNO9IS TY SLINDYID NOILVOINOQWIWOO 5 Q3QN3AWOO3S SMIVd O3Q 3IHS TWWNCIAIGNI I 171 Varec Inc Order Codes 172 Installation and Operations Manual Document Code IOMO39GVAE2513 Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta GA 30092 USA Tel 1 770 447 9202 Fax 1 770 662 8939 www varec com 2006 Varec Inc All Rights Reserved This document is for information purposes only Varec Inc makes no warranties express or implied in this summary The names of actual companies and products mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners
14. FT This section describes how to start up the ViewRTU program The components of EJ the window are also described in this section VIEW RTU Varec Inc 101 Using ViewRTU Execute the ViewRTU program 1 Select the ViewRTU program group from the Windows Program Manager 2 Double click on the icon to execute the ViewRTU application If more than one 8130 RTU definition file DVR exists the following dialog box is displayed 5 MULTIPLE VERSIONS More than one configuration version has been detected Select the default version to use Figure 8 1 ViewRTU Version Selection Dialog Each version file contains setup information that matches the firmware in the 8130 RTU This information allows a single version of ViewRTU to configure multiple versions of the 8130 RTU For example MSTG1_00 DVR is a definition file that is compatible with 8130 RTU firmware version 1 00 Select the version that matches the version of firmware in the 8130 RTU Note that you can determine the firmware version by viewing the SysVer parameter of the SYS point 3 Choose the desired version and select OK If only one 8130 RTU definition file DVR exists the main window appears instead The main window is seen below When the ViewRTU program is opened a new file appears in the window The components of this window are explained below 102 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit App
15. None Stop Bits C Odd Even eq C2 iv Data Scan Enabled iV Auto Connect At Start Up Number of Retries 3 Auto Download Time Timeout x 100ms 30 Download Firmware Timeout x 100ms 600 Cancel Figure 9 12 Port Communications Setup Dialog Port Communications Setup Dialog This dialog box allows the user to enter the specifications of the 8130 RTU s communication port When OK is selected the setup data is stored as the default setup next time ViewRTU or Tank Gauge Configuration is executed Status The Status option is provided so the user is able to observe communications data The following dialog box appears when this option is selected 138 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Figure 9 13 Communications Diagnostics Dialog Connect The Connect option is used when the user needs to search for a specific 8130 RTU The following dialog box appears when the option is selected Figure 9 14 8130 RTU Search Dialog 8130 RTU Search Dialog This dialog box lists the address description and current status of each 8130 RTU From this dialog box the user can select an 8130 RTU and establish communications with the selected 8130 RTU Varec Inc 139 Using Tank Gauge Configurator The Options Menu ViewRTU Test TCF File Point Config Communications Options Help Export All Import All Exit Tank Configurator Fig
16. There are some differences between the regular and spreadsheet methods First the user is not able to view the Point Connections window in Spreadsheet Mode This mode is used mainly for viewing and entering point data Second the spreadsheet focuses on points of a single type it does not offer a big picture view of multiple point types Adding Multiple Points The user is able to add a point by using the same method used to add single points The user can click on the Add Point icon from the toolbar or by selecting Add from the Point menu in the Main window Once the point is added the user is then able to define the point Defined points appear in the Point Icon Selection Area and in the Spreadsheet Summary of the Main window Note The user can add a point by selecting Add from the Point menu in the Spreadsheet Mode window This menu is described later in the section Adding Multiple Points Double click on the desired point type in the Spreadsheet Summary The following example Spreadsheet Mode window appears CC SPREADSHEET MODE Point Edit Options ofu LevelRef TempRef WaterRei ip u o 00 0 NMS53 00 Level Al 00 Value 01 fol ul 1 01 0 NMS53 01 Level AL02 Value Al 09 Value ol ul TANK 02 0 NMS53 02 Level Al 03 Value Al 10 Value ip u 3 0 NMS53 03 Level ALU4 Value Al 11 Value 04 0 NMS53 04 Level 05
17. Varec Inc 79 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function FlowRef The Flow status reference This parameter is used for shutdown lockout logic Normally a DI point is used for this although any type of point that produces a value of Normal can be specified For example an AISTAT point can be used if the signal originates from an Analog Input point If the value of the FlowRef is Normal then the pump will be allowed to continue to run If the value of the FlowRef is anything other than Normal such as High Low or Alarm the Command will be Stop and the pump will be shut down If the PressRef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate based upon other constraints The FlowDelay is used to holdoff the logic decision so that startup conditions may stabilize AlarmRef The AlarmRef allows the user to specify a reference to a DAL AAL or other point that provides a coded value indicating an alarm status The value specified by the AlarmRef is stored locally in the AlarmValue parameter If the pump is running an AlarmValue equal to anything other than Normal will shut the pump down If the AlarmRef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate based upon other constraints TotalRef The TotalRef is a reference to a ATOT PTOT or other point that provides a flow total value The value specified by the TotalRef is stored locally in the FlowTotal parameter When used in conjunction w
18. ee RM RR ACRI RR UR aca 154 Using ViewRTU 155 System Requirements 155 Installing VieWRTU 0 eren RR III 155 Executing ted heed ave 155 ViewRTU WIADdOW 2 ha eun rx nth ree tum m adn rese Ree e iR pud d 157 The ViewRTU Menu Bar 158 The File 158 The Point Menu seem hate hd Re RN Re a DIA odo RES as 159 The Config Menu 161 The Communications 164 The Options Menu i 4 e REEL eae 166 The Help Menus us ek heb Eee xe HE Peta aa ed ER is 168 Using exer e edades 4 e ae 168 o DUI TP 169 Configuring Single 169 Modifying Values p Sete a e p Le ot IL RR 172 Configuring Multiple Points llle 176 Creating and Editing 182 Using Tank Gauge Configurator 185 Executing the Tank Gauge Configurator 185 ViewRTU ene RR Rede Rd d 1
19. 8205 16 Channel Analog Input Module Option 1 Class 1 Div 2 Hazardous location certification 2 N8207 8 Channel Analog Output 1 N8208 TIWAY Interface 1 N8210 Varec Mark Space Interface Option 1 Mark Space Micro 4 wire 1800 1900 4000 Matrix 1600 1700 N8211 Current Loop Interface Option 1 Whessoe Bus protocol Option 2 GPE protocol N8212 Saab Interface N8213 V1 Interface Varec N8214 Enraf Interface N8215 L amp J Tankway Interface N8216 LON Interface Barton Instruments 1 N8217 Dual RS 232 Interface 1 Option Product designation See control panel installation detail on facing page 170 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Uni QNnOSO9 39505 SNOILVOINNWWOD s SIET oj e HLS m S annon E 0 oA MIB S S of moo S S e ET RE winan 0 30 1 SNIMIM 1 915 171910 WOIdAL 1028 7300W X04 19902 1 HUOO I 2 X04 1 HUu08 G 7 v dnON9 71 HWOGZ lt gdnON9 YOs 91909 9 2 9 jnO6 0 9 7 V 31909 9 lt 09 00 651 gt OSI 0892 gt DOA Q13l4 3AION393ONINON Q31vi2OSSv ONIMOTIO4 3Hl ONIS Z S028 NO 1 60 8 C 60c8 L 2028 1300W JHL OL Q3193NNOO 38 AYN SNOILVDO1 SnOQOMVZVH Q v SdnON9 Z NOISIAG
20. Expansion Modules 4 2 Hardware and 7 Hardware lt 7 Hardware Block Diagram rockon tuto dora Sor doe goa 8 Software Description 0 000 ccc teens 8 Software Features 0 0 eee tenes 9 Real Time Multitasking Executive 9 Real Time Clock 0 2 0 ccc cee eee 9 Automatic Fault Recovery 9 aiuti PETITES 10 GOMMUNICATIONS es REALE RR RI ne A 10 Protocols iie pra E RR ERU RE e ES TR ee RR e RU 10 VO Scanning Tasks nux te bee Lies MER RR ER Re d hie tan tee Late 11 Point EXeCUtiVe s te ve edle ie en pm us 11 Database 11 System Tasks 12 3 1 51 3 13 General Safety 13 Installation Safety 13 Installation b ata to eek tege Ste eio B 14 Mounting the 8130 15 Mounting the 16 Wiring Up
21. A dedicated RS 232 port is also provided for use in diagnostic testing or local programming Normally a laptop computer is used for this function I O Expansion Modules Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit The 8130 RTU can interface to a variety of field devices and intelligent instrumentation via expansion modules Many diverse products are available to serve a variety of needs The available expansion modules are listed below Model 8201 16 Channel Digital In Out Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Model 8205 16 Channel Analog Input Model 8207 8 Channel Analog Output Model 8208 TIWAY Interface Model 8210 Varec Mark Space Interface Model 8211 Current Loop Interface Model 8212 Saab Interface Model 8213 VI Interface Varec Model 8214 Enraf Interface Model 8215 L amp J Tankway Interface Model 8216 LON Interface Barton Instruments Model 8217 Dual RS 232 Interface Varec Inc 5 Overview 6 Installation and Operations Manual 2 Hardware and Software In addition to the Input Output functions of the 8130 RTU several other standard features are provided These features include a watch dog timer real time clock a real time multi tasking executive a built in software library data scanning routines and database management The 8130 RTU is designed to be supported by a full range of I O interfaces Through these interfaces the 81
22. Analog Inputs AI Analog Functions AIFUNC Analog Status AISTAT Alarm Selector ALSEL Byte Register BREG Clock CLK Command Activator CMNDR Communications COM Coded Register CREG Digital Alarm DAL Digital Input DI Diagnostic DIAG Digital Output DO Double Word Register DREG Floating Point Register FPREG Gateway Block GWBLK 1 O Configuration IO Integer Register IREG Modbus Gateway MODGW Modbus 1 0 Module MFIO Pulse Totalizer PTOT Pump Status Control PUMP Scaler Point SCALER Signal Selector SIGSEL System Information SYS Event Timer Counter TIMER Tag Register TREG Unsigned Long Integer Register ULREG Valve Status Control VALVE Varec Inc 45 8130 RTU Software Blocks Comm Watchdog WDOG Analog Alarm Point AAL m The Analog Alarm point monitors a floating point value from an Al or any other point RRL Parameters type that produces a floating point value The point activates an output if an alarm condition is detected The database parameters used by the AAL point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to AAL 0OO Description The point description can
23. Modbus Slave iue nk RR BIA RR On RE a BIRD 44 Inherent 8130 RTU Software Blocks 45 Analog Alarm Point AAL 46 1 ene teeth x Rm x Reim adie ate x Rd dies eae eas 48 Analog Functions 50 Analog Status 5 51 Alarm Selector ALSEL llle ren 53 Byte Register BREG ELLA i MEE IEEE i A 54 a aE aT OLET NM 54 Command Activator 55 Communications COM 57 Coded Register CREG 58 Digital Alarm DAL ed pit ete os EC th d Rie n Cn eto o Re al ad 59 Digital Input DI i ruin tx aite c et dg 60 Diagnostic DIAG i e dr Rum uere Robe Ren FER prod 63 Digital Qutput DO RR ek E RR aie hA DR Res RR RE Rc 64 Double Word Register 65 Emulator rrt ra dw a t xu ete egre ha cafa ci a e er ac e 65 EMU Gateway 67 Floating Point Register FPREG 68 Gateway Block 68 beca Pee vesti fondi taU
24. Mode HEX byte value for the Operational Mode 0x01 Swap mode ReadCmd Command to use to Read data from the slave device WriteCmd Command to use to Write data to the slave device Data Address and Block Size Data Address and Block Size pairs The MFPREG point will read data from pairs the slave device starting at 1 and request Sizel registers Up to four blocks may be defined If the Size is zero then no read operation is performed The data is returned to the Value array Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Dynamic Parameters Function ValueO Register values from slave device ValueO will always correspond to the Value63 first register read from the slave device using the Addr1 and Size
25. The LDI lets you edit point data in the 8130 RTU database just as you can in ViewRTU You can also use this function just after adding a point since the LDI does not configure the point with the ViewRTU default settings To edit a point that already exists in the 8130 RTU database using the LDI Interface Edit a point in the 8130 RTU database 1 From the main menu press E The point type menu appears 2 Press ENTER to scroll through the point types 3 Select the point type you want to edit by pressing the point type s corresponding number then pressing ENTER The system prompts you for the number to edit 3 DIAG 4 CLK 5 IO 6 DI Edit Pnt Type 6 to edit DI Figure 10 9 Edit Point Type 4 Enter the point number you want to edit and press ENTER The point data appears Press ENTER to scroll through the point data The data will update in real time 6 Tochange the point type over the existing data and press ENTER If you entered an invalid entry the LDI screen displays Invalid Value Press ENTER and enter the change again Varec Inc 157 Local Diagnostic Interface If you only have Level 1 LDI security the LDI prompts you to confirm the change Press Y to proceed or N to cancel the edit 7 The LDI changes the point Listing Points You can get a list of all the 8130 RTU points by using the LDI List Points function This function
26. an existing point by clicking the Edit icon from the toolbar or by selecting Edit Point from the Point menu The Select Point to Edit dialog box appears Varec Inc 105 Using ViewRTU a SELECT POINT TO EDIT Point Type DI Point Num 8 01 08 Figure 8 6 Edit Point Selection Dialog Edit Point Selection Dialog This dialog box displays a list of defined point types and corresponding point numbers The point icon is also displayed for identification as well as the tag if a tag has been assigned Once a point is selected the Edit Point dialog box appears point Cg Point Help Current Point 0 Point Desc 01 00 Digital Inputs Point Tag 1 Auto Description Point Description VCP1 Hand Off Auto Switch Channel Input Channel 1 ChanQuan Channel Quantity 1 alue 0 Value for RawValue 0 Off alue_1 Value for RawValue 1 On alue 2 Value for RawValue 2 Undefined alue 3 Value for RawValue 3 Undefined Reverse Reverse No Latch Latch No Iv Digital Input Value Undefined Raw Input Value 0 0000 Point Status 0 Time of Last Update Sun Jan 04 16 03 02 2004 PntCheckSum Point CheckSum 0 0000 Next Examine Download Connections Previous Exit Upload Figure 8 7 Edit Point Dialog Edit Point Dialog This dialog box contains all dynamic and configurable field information T
27. 4800 9600 and 19200 The default is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N Mode Parameter used to control the operation of the RG7000 point Default is 0x0000 LevelDeadband The LevelDeadband sets the deadband for the Change of State mode The default is 0 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when a Value Changes State Parameter values can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low Default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 240 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the RG7000 point on the Model 8203 and verifies it is scanning for gauges Varec Inc 143 Dynamic Parameters Function
28. Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N Varec Inc 109 Config Constant Parameters Function Mode Parameter used to control the operation of the TM4590 point It has different meanings depending on whether the 8303 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module is used 8303 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module 0x0010 Use old NMS operational status codes 8211 Current Loop Whessoe Bus Interface Module Mode 0 Task 1 Task 36 Task 17 Task 30 Mode 0x01 Task 1 only Mode 0x02 Task 36 only Mode 0x04 Task 17 only Mode 0x08 Task 30 only LevelDeadband The LevelDeadband sets the deadband for the Change of State mode The default is 0 TempDeadband The TempDeadband is used to set the Change of State deadband for the temperature The default is 25 degrees FastScanMode Places the TM4590 point in the Fast Scan mode Values are Enable or Disable Filter The Filter parameter is used in conjunction with the LevelFilter parameter to determine the reasonableness of the Level value Level data is stored in a temporary buffer A check is made each time a new reading is made by comparing the values in the temporary buffer If the data is within the LevelFilter value of all the values in the buffer the data is considered to be reasonable and it is accepted into the Level parameter The number of samples stored in the
29. Field wiring terminal block J2 J4 Surge Shield ground connector J3 Network terminating resistor jumpers W4 amp W5 Firmware Assembly 012346 Rev 011299 E Es mh EN LL EM Q ID DIP Switch SW1 Firmware LED indicators 01 04 Network terminating resistor jumpers W4 amp W5 2 Field wiring terminal block J2 J4 Surge Shield E od ground connector J3 3 P Network terminating 2 J4 resistor jumpers W4 amp W5 Figure 5 2 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Expansion Module ID DIP Switch SW1 The ID DIP Switch is a binary switch that sets the unit ID number 1 4 The switch is set according to its location on the motherboard Set to 1 for P1 2 for P2 3 for P3 and 4 for P4 Refer to the figure below 32 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit CLOSED OPEN Address 1 CLOSED OPEN Address 3 Figure 5 3 ID DIP Switch Settings LED Indicators D1 D4 The LEDs indicate the status of the Model 8203 Figure 5 4 Model 8203 LED Indicators LED Function DI Indicates CPU activity D2 Indicates communications between the RTU and the Model 8203 D3 A transmission is being sent D4 A response is being received Field wiring terminal block J2 J4 CLOSED OPEN Address 2 CLOSED OPEN Address 4 Caution Connect the ground termi
30. If no value is specified no conversion will be performed Note that the LevelUnits must be set properly If the LevelUnits and the LevelConvert are the same no conversion is performed AlLowRange Analog Input 1 Low Range AlHighRange Analog Input 1 High Range Al2LowRange Analog Input 2 Low Range Al2HighRange Analog Input 2 High Range Al3LowRange Analog Input 3 Low Range Al3HighRange Analog Input 3 High Range ValueMin Minimum Analog Input Integer Value ValueMax Maximum Analog Input Integer Value LevelDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Level that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 1 Mode Operational Mode Values are 0x02 Communication via FCU Varec Inc 145 Configuration Parameters Function BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 The default is 4800 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8b 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report
31. Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Data Format Description Byte 8 bit value 127 to 128 Unsigned Byte 8 bit value 0 to 255 Coded Unsigned Integer representing a digital state such as On Off Open Closed etc Integer 16 bit value 32766 to 32767 Unsigned Integer 16 bit value 0 to 65535 IEEE floating point 32 bit value with mantissa and exponent Time Unsigned Long Integer representing the number of milliseconds since Jan 1 1970 Tag ASCII character strings variable in length Used for Tag and Description parameters Point Reference Reference to a point parameter Format is TYPE NUMBER PARAM where TYPE is Al DI DO etc NUMBER is point number 0 255 PARAM is the parameter of interest such as Value or Command For example Al 00 Value Unsigned Long Integer 32 bit value 0 to 4 294 967 295 Pointer 32 bit value representing a pointer to another parameter or memory location Long Integer 32 bit value Integer Hex format Integer in Hex 0x0000 to OxFFFF Time HH MM SS Unsigned Long Integer representing the number of milliseconds since midnight Time MM DD YY Unsigned Long Integer representing the number of milliseconds since Jan 1 1970 Unsigned Long Integer Hex format Unsigned Long Integer in Hex 0x00000000 to OxFFFFFFFF Common Para
32. LevelRef Level Reference NMS53 00 NMS53 00 Level Figure 10 14 Modify Reference Dialog 3 Choose the point you want the LDI to display by selecting the type number parameter val ues from the pull down menus 4 When you finish making your selection press Download The LDI adds the point to the CONFIG window in the Edit Point dialog 5 Repeat this process until you have entered all the points you want the LDI to list To set the update rate 1 From the Internal Diagnostics Edit Point dialog box double click on the UpdateRate row The Modify Value dialog box appears displaying the current update rate 160 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit MODIFY VALUE AirTemp Temperature 65 7 Store Cancel Figure 10 15 Modify Value Dialog 2 Enter a new update rate and click Download Viewing Update Mode To set the LDI to list the points you entered in ViewRTU s Internal Diagnostics press lt U gt from the LDI main menu to activate the Update Mode The LDI screen lists the points you entered in ViewRTU Internal Diagnostics Figure 10 16 Points Entered with ViewRTU Diagnostics To return to the main menu while in Update Mode press lt ESC gt Tank Mode You can set the LDI to Tank Mode if you only want to view add and edit tank information Tank Mode works just like Edit Point but limits LDI use to
33. Point Edit Options Import Ctrl M LevelRet TempRef WaterRet j B Export Ctrl X Ctrl V Hide Row Col Ctrl4H Unhide All NMS53 00 Level Al 00 Value Al 1 Value NMS53 01 Level Al 02 Value Al 09 Value NMS53 02 Level Al 03 Value Al 10 Value NMS53 03 Level Al 04 Value Al 11 Value NMS53 04 Level Al 05 Value Al 12 Value NMS53 05 Level Al 06 Value Al 13 Value NMS53 06 Level Al 07 Value Al 14 Value NMS53 07 Level Al 08 Value Al 15 Value TANK 03 TANK 4 TANK 05 06 TANK 07 ojos cc c c Iw 2 jJ Figure 8 38 Spreadsheet Mode The Options Menu Import The Import option allows the user to import a point or group of points that match the current point type The imported file is named according to the point type with the CSV file extension Export The Export option allows the user to export a selected point or all the points that match the current point type to the default directory The export file is saved in a file named according to the point type with the CSV file extension Note The user is able to change the source directory in the INI file View The View option allows the user to display selected parameter types Selecting this option displays the following View Point Parameters dialog box VIEW POINT PARAMETERS OPTIONS Config Constant Scratch Command System Cancel Dynamic Figure 8 39
34. This can be accomplished using the Export All option or by point type using the Spreadsheet Mode The data is read from files in the CSV file format For example all of the Analog Input points are imported from the file AI CSV The user must select the subdirectory to import the data from The CSV file data can also be imported using the Spreadsheet mode View I O List The View I O List option allows the user to create a list of the 1 0 points connected to the 8130 RTU The list is limited by listing points that have the Chan or Module parameters These parameters are always used in cases where 1 is involved The list is created by writing to the file POINTLST TXT and launching the Notepad program The user can print this file using Notepad or exit and return to ViewRTU Set Time in 8130 RTU The Set Time in 8130 RTU option sets the time in the CLK point to the same time as the PC running ViewRTU Configure Tank Gauges The Configure Tank Gauges Option opens the Tank Gauge Configuration subsystem See the Using Tank Gauge Configuration section for more information Edit Strap Tables The Edit Strap Tables Option lets the user enter and modify strap table data See the Application section of this chapter for more information on editing strap tables Create Strap Table HEX File The Create Strap Table HEX File option saves the strap tables in a HEX format HEX files can then be written to a PROM for storage in the 8130 RT
35. Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N DetectTime Modbus 8130 RTU Mode character timer in 1 100s of a second The default value is 100 Dynamic Parameters Function Message Current request message displayed in hex format Command Current command Values include Read Output Status 2 Read Input Status 3 Read Output Registers 4 Read Input Registers 5 Force Single Coil 6 Preset Single Register 15 Force Multiple Coils 16 Preset Multiple Registers Addr Data Address for current request Elapse Time of the last request from the master PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MODGW point provides status information for the communications with any Modbus masters used with the 8130 RTU On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the MODGW point is created automatically whenever the Modbus Slave protocol is defined for a COM point The point number created will correspond to the ComPort such that MODGW 09 is created for COM 0 MODGW 10 is created for COM 1 and MODGW 11 is created for COM 2 Use the Upload command from the Config Menu to retrieve the data from the MODGW point or any other points created automatically by the 8130 RTU The MODGW point provides information about the current command a
36. Valid values are 0x80 Swap Mode Swap the order of integer and floating point values LevelOffset Specified the amount of offset to add to the Level The default is 0 TempOffset Specified the amount of offset to add to the Temperature The default is 0 LevelDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Level that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is O TempDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Temp that must occur for the temperature to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 25 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Varec Inc 103 Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog ta
37. dialog The Modify Strap Tables dialog appears Figure 9 22 Edit Strap Table Dialog Edit Strap Table Fields This dialog box lets you modify tank gauge strap tables Level Units Varec Inc 145 Using Tank Gauge Configurator The user can convert the level units of the strap table by selecting one of the options in the Level Units list The system asks you to confirm your selection Volume Units The user can convert the volume units of the strap table by selecting one of the options in the Volume Units list The system asks you to confirm your selection Add Replace The Add Replace button lets the user add a new strap table entry or replace an entry with modified data To create a new entry enter the table information in the Level and Volume fields and click Add Replace The system creates an entry with the information you entered To change an existing entry select the table entry from the list window and enter the new information in the Level and Volume fields Then click Add Replace The system replaces the entry with the revised data Delete The Delete button lets the user delete strap table entries Select the entry and click Delete The system removes the strap table entry from the list box Import The Import button lets the user import a strap table from a file The import file must exist in the correct format with a TST or CSV extension The TST files are used by FuelsManager Export Th
38. displaying a list of configuration definition files The user selects the desired file from this list The user is able to select an existing configuration file by clicking on the Open button from the toolbar or by selecting Open from the File menu When selected a dialog box appears displaying a list of configuration files All Tank Gauge configuration files are identified by the TCF extension Once a file is selected the point configuration data of the selected file is displayed If the directory is empty the user has the option of creating a new file by typing in the file name Save The user is able to save the opened configuration file by clicking on the Save button from the toolbar or by selecting Save from the File menu The user can save the file any time the configuration has changed If the file exists in the directory the configuration is stored to disk using the current file name If the file has not been saved before or the name does not exist in the directory the user is prompted to enter a configuration file name Save As The Save As option is used to save the currently opened file under a different name When selected a dialog box appears prompting the user to enter a file name If the selected file name already exists the user has the option of overwriting the file Otherwise the user can create a separate file containing all the current configuration data of the present file If the user chooses to create a se
39. 2 P1 J4 1 2 3 2 1 P2 J2 4 5 6 2 2 P2 J4 1 2 3 3 1 4 4 5 6 3 2 P3 J2 1 2 3 4 1 P4 J4 4 5 6 4 2 P4 J2 1 2 3 38 Installation and Operations Manual 6 8130 RTU Software Blocks This chapter describes the Software Blocks that the user can configure using the ViewRTU program Software Blocks are subprograms used to perform various functions within the 8130 RTU Each Software Block contains all the logic constants and data to perform a particular function For example the AI Software Block scans the Model 8205 and converts the digital data from the A D converter to a floating point value The PTOT Software Block counts pulses from a Model 8204 and calculates the rate and provides a running total The VALVE software block can be configured to control a valve using a Model 8201 or Model 8204 Other Software Blocks are used to configure I O scanning and communications to external systems Every system function of the 8130 RTU is accessible via a Software Block The user only has to add Software Blocks using ViewRTU and then configure a few parameters in order to perform a desired function The purpose of this chapter is to explain the parameters of each software Block This chapter does not explain the procedures used to configure the Software Blocks Refer to the following Using ViewRTU chapter for Software Block configuration procedures Description The user can configure pre defined subprograms known as Softwa
40. 25 75 Figure 9 25 Spreadsheet Mode Window Note Refer to the following Entering Tank Gauge Configurator Point Data section for a description of the Spreadsheet Mode window Entering Tank Gauge Configurator Point Data This section explains the window used to configure multiple points of a single point type When the user double clicks on a point type the following example dialog box appears C3 SPREADSHEET MODE B Point Edit Options MessageNi UnitNum TankNumbe TankLabel LevelHiHi 1 Tanki 245 11 1 11 2 2 Tank 2 25 0 11 3 3 Tank 3 24 0 11 4 4 Tank 4 25 75 Spreadsheet Mode Entering Point Parameter Data Spreadsheet Mode This window displays a list of all the point numbers of a selected point type The user is able to add configure and edit points The user is able to select and enter the parameters for each point or group of points The user can also export import files and control the selection of displayed parameters This window is similar to the Edit Point window The two windows contain the same parameters In the spreadsheet mode the user is able to view and modify all the points of the selected type In the Edit Point window the user steps through a window for each point number using the Next and Previous buttons The left two columns D and U are used to download and upload respectively the information found in the corresponding row s The third column lists the point num
41. 32 bit Register 0048 Elapse Time of the last scan Interval Amount of time in HR MIN SEC between scans of the gauge PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The GSIME point provides an interface to GSI Model 2000 Tank Gauge Transmitters Tank gauges are connected directly to a 8303 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module The ID must match the unit address of the GSI transmitter and the Baud Rate must match the Baud Rate of the gauge The DataMode must match the engineering units of the gauge Conversion from Metric to English or vice versa can be performed be setting the LevelConvert and the TempConvert parameters in the MODSCAN point associated with the GSIMB point The Level can be offset by entering a value for the LevelOffset parameter The LevelOffset is added to the Level after any conversion have be performed Likewise the TempOffset can be used to provide a temperature offset 102 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Varec Multi Function Transmitter MBMFT The Varec Model 4200 Tank Gauge point provides an interface to Varec 4200 MBMFT Multi Function Transmitters The Model 4200 MBMFT can communicate using a number of different protocols including Mark Space and Modbus The MBMFT point interfaces to Model 4200 MBMFTs using Modbus This point provides level temperature density and volume data Point and gauge status information is also avail
42. 8 Channel Analog Output 8208 TIWAY Interface 8210 Varec Mark Space Interface 8211 Current Loop Interface 8212 Saab Interface 8213 VI Interface Varec 8214 Enraf Interface 8215 L amp J Tankway Interface 8216 LON Interface Barton Instruments 8217 Dual RS 232 Interface Dynamic Parameters Function lOStatus lOStatus4 Status word for each port The bits are defined as follows 0x0200 High Queue Change of State 0x0100 Low Queue Change of State 0x0080 Dynamic Change of State 0x0040 Config Change of State 0x0008 Module startup error 0x0004 Module database is empty 0x0002 Module configuration has changed 0x0001 Module is no longer responding 1 IOCommand4 Command to Reset a particular module PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point 72 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The IO point provides status and configuration information for 1 0 modules used with the 8130 RTU The IO point is created automatically at startup The IO point then interrogates each port to determine modules are present In many cases the presence of a module will also cause the automatic creation of scanner points Integer Register IREG The Integer Register point provides two bytes of sto
43. A API L IbsZft3 G Gauge Command Upload Group Dynamic Matrix Group 1 Issue gauge VPos Vertical Matrix Position 4 command HPos Horizontal Matrix Position 0 WiiteData Write Data ReplyData Command Reply Data 1 000000 CmdStatus Status of Last Command Complete Level Tank Level 1579 599976 Position Displacer Position 1579 599976 Temp Tank Temperature 0 0 Minimize Next Download Connections Previous Exit Upload Figure 7 1 SG6000x Servo Tank Point Edit Dialog Weights amp Measures Protection The SG6000 point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameters can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters when unlocked and will be greyed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal to Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point 108 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Varec 4590 Tank Side Monitor TM4590 The TM4590 point provides an interface to the Varec TM4590 Tank Side Monitor This point provides level temperature interface and density data Other information such as point and gauge status is also available in this software block The TM4590 can communicate using a number of different protocols including V1 Modbus amp Whessoe Bus The TM4590 point can execute on a Model 8203 MODx xx firmware a Model 8213 V1 x xx firmware or a Mod
44. Addr2 1201 and Value 2 is 0x2222 a value of 0x2222 will be placed in the register address 1201 Pulse Totalizer PTOT The Pulse Totalizer counts pulse totals from discrete input sources such as the Model 8201 Digital Input Output Module or the Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module Wu PTOT Parameters The database parameters used by the PTOT point are listed and described below 76 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Flow Meter or kW usage meter The default tag is set to PTOT 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to PTOT 00 Module The input source of the pulses to be counted Valid values are 8201 Model 8201 16 Channel Digital 1 0 Module 8204 Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module Channel The physical input Channel 1 32 The default is to match the Point Name i e 00 Channel 1 Port The selected I O port This field is reserved for compatibility with existing Series 8150 FID systems and
45. Al 07 Value Al 14 Value 07 0 NMS53 07 Level Al 08 Value Al 15 Value _ B Figure 8 33 Spreadsheet Mode The Point Menu This option is useful for creating deleting and editing points without having to exit out of the Spreadsheet mode The Edit Menu Point Edit Options cho LevelRef TempRef E Ctrl P E Paste amp Dnld Cirlat 0 NMS53 00 Level Al 00 Value Al 01 Value Ctri s 0 NMS53 01 Level Al 02 Value AI 09 Value TANK 02 0 NMS53 02 Level Al 03 Value Al 10 Value TANK 03 0 NMS53 03 Level Al 04 Value Al 11 Value 04 0 553 04 1 Al 05 Value Al 12 Value 05 0 553 05 1 Al 06 Value AI 13 Value 06 0 NMS53 06 Level Al 07 Value Al 14 Value TANK 07 0 NMS53 07 Level AL 08 Value Al 15 Value fol ELJ Figure 8 34 Spreadsheet Mode The Edit Menu Copy The Copy option allows the user to copy data from a one or more selected cells 1 Select one or more cells to To select one or more rows click the number s To select one or more columns click on the parameter s 2 Select the Copy option from the Edit menu The selected cells outline changes from black to red Note To undo the Copy option press the Esc key Pressing the Esc key removes the selec tion outline from the selected cells Paste The Paste option allows the user to paste the copied group of cells red outline to the currently selected group of ce
46. All the point icons are displayed in the Point Icon Selection Area Point icons are visual representations of various software functions When a new file is opened several default point icons are displayed in the Point Icon Selection Area These points are described in the 8130 RTU Software Blocks chapter Varec Inc 103 Using ViewRTU The ViewRTU Menu Bar This section describes all the menus found in the ViewRTU menu bar The icons found in the Toolbar are shown next to each associated menu option This section primarily describes the functionality of each menu option ViewRTU applications are presented in the Application section at the end of the chapter The File Menu The File menu allows the user to create open and save configuration files This menu also allows the user to save the current configuration to a different file name C3 ViewRTU Test rcf Jo t3 File Point Config Communications Options Help New Open Ctrl4O Save Ctrl 5 Figure 8 3 The File Menu New The user is able to create a new configuration file by clicking the New icon from the tool bar or by selecting New from the File menu When selected a dialog box appears displaying a list of configuration definition files The user selects the desired file from this list The user is able to select an existing configuration file by clicking the Open icon from the tool bar or by selecting Open from the File menu W
47. An MG5000 point is needed for each tank being monitored An MG5000 point is needed for each tank being monitored Note There are two types of MTG Tank Gauge Interfaces available DDA and MTS The type of gauge determines the type of firmware required The DDA type gauge uses MTSX XX firmware The Modbus type gauge uses MODX XX firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MG5000 point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to the number i e point 0 MG5000 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to MG5000 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the MG5000 A value of 255 is undefined Chan Model 8203 channel ID DDA Physical Address OxCO OxFF The default is OxCO Modbus Physical Add 0x01 to OxF7 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data F feet m Millimeters M Meters I Inches The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Level can be converted from Metric to E
48. Analog Current 2 Analog3 Analog Current 3 146 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No error 0x0001 Gauge Not Responding 0x0010 FCU is offline if Mode 20x02 0x1000 Weights amp Measure Seal is Enabled 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8212 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8212 has stopped updating Elapse Time of the last scan WMCheckSum Weights and Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMSeal parameter is set to enable PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The RTG point provides an interface to Saab Radar Tank Gauges RTG using two methods Directly to the TRL 2 bus using a Model 8212 Via an FCU using a Model 8203 MODx xx firmware Model 8212 TRL 2 Interface The Model 8212 provides the means to connect directly to the TRL 2 bus The Model 8212 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicat
49. Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function Value Represents status of the point in coded format Typical values are Low High or Normal The result can be set to any valid coded data value by changing the ValueLow ValueHigh and ValueNormal parameters RefValue Floating Point value of the PntRef parameter used to determine the Value parameter PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The AISTAT point continually monitors the value of the PntRef reference and stores the data locally in RefValue It then compares RefValue to TripLow and TripHigh in order to determine whether the Value is set to Low High or Normal The user can override the result by changing the values of the ValueLow ValueHigh and ValueNormal parameters Interfacing to Other Points The AISTAT point can be used
50. Configuration Parameters Application The MFIO point continually scans the Allen Bradley Flex 1 0 device using the ID parameter The Module and Chan determine which Model 8203 Module and Channel are used for communications to the Allen Bradley Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 etc If the Module parameter is set to 0 the MFIO point will use one of the communications channels on the 8130 RTU Motherboard An MFIO point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU Up to 8 Registers can be read with each MFIO point The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameter of the Allen Bradley module Each point can read up to 8 consecutive register values and write to 3 configuration addresses The ReadCmd parameter determines the command to read data and the WriteCmd parameter is the command used for write operations The Addr1 and Sizel parameters determine the read register values while the Addr2 4 and Value2 4 determine the configuration values that can be written to the Allen Bradley Set the Addr and Sizel parameters to read the data from the device The response will be placed in the Valuel Value8 parameters For example if Addr1 1000 and Sizel 6 then the MFIO point will read 6 values and place the data in Valuel Value6 Likewise if configuration data needs to be set Addr2 Addr4 sets the address to be written to and Value 2 Value 4 is the data written to that address For example if
51. Foundation Delrin is a registered trademark of E I du Pont de Nemours Co Inc Wilmington DL Dow Corning RTV 737 is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Inc Midland MI Loctite is a registered trademark of Loctite Corp Newington CT Teflon is a registered trademark of E 1 du Pont de Nemours Co Inc Wilmington DL Viton is a registered trademark of E I Du Pont de Nemours Co Inc Wilmington DL FuelsManager is a registered trademark of Varec Inc Copyright 2004 8130 RTU8130 is a registered trademark of Varec Inc Copyright 2003 TankGate is a trademark of Varec Inc 2003 TankView is a registered trademark of Varec Inc Copyright 2003 Varec is a registered trademark of Varec Inc Copyright 2003 All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies Disclaimer of Warranties The contract between the Seller and the Buyer states the entire obligation of the Seller The contents of this instruction manual shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement commitment or relationship between the Seller and Buyer There are no express or Varec Inc Remote Terminal Unit implied warranties set out in this instruction manual The only warranties that apply are those in the existing contract between the Seller and Buyer The 8201 RTU has not been tested by Varec under all possible operational conditions and Varec may not have all the data relative to
52. ID parameter The Module and Chan determine which Model 8203 Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 etc If the Module parameter is set to O the MIREG point will use one of the communications channels on the 8130 RTU Motherboard An MIREG point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU Up to 64 registers may be read with each MIREG point Multiple MIREG points can be used with a single slave device if necessary The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the slave device The communications parameters are set as each MIREG point is processed A total of four blocks may be read or written The ReadCmd determines the command to read data and the WriteCmd is the command used for write operations The Addr and Size parameters determine the addresses Set the Addr1 and Sizel parameters to read a data block from the slave device The response will be placed in the ValueO Value63 parameters For example if Addr1 100 and Sizel 10 then the MIREG point will read 10 register values and place the data in ValueO Value9 If a second block is defined then the data response will start in Value10 If the Size is 0 then that block is disabled The Mode parameter can be used to swap the byte order of integers 124 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Modbus Scanner MSCAN The Modbus Sca
53. Note Not all Host protocols support the Change of State method The 8130 RTU Slave pro tocol used with FuelsManager supports either method The 8130 RTU Master protocol used to communicate with other 8130 RTU s or intelligent communication modules such as the Model 8203 or Model 8210 also supports both methods Note The Modbus protocol is Scan based Therefore the Report and Maxtime parameters have no meaning Scanners Scanners are tasks in the 8130 RTU that continuously scan the I O hardware and store the data in tables For Simple 1 low level point tasks such as the Al DI and PTOT points continually execute read data and perform filtering and conversion algorithms For example the Analog Input scanner referred to as AISCAN reads data from the A D converter on the Model 8205 every 20 msec and stores the raw data in an array The Al point executes every 250 msec and uses some or all of the data in the raw data in order to calculate the Value parameter Likewise the DI and PTOT points use information collected by the DISCAN task For Intelligent I O a protocol handler associated with a COM point scans the remote system based upon addressing and timing information provided by the user For example the RSCAN point interfaces to Intelligent I O modules such as the Model 8210 Mark Space Interface to gather data for MSTX and WV2046 points On the Model 8210 a MSSCAN point manages the scanning of the tank gauge transmitters and provi
54. Off Value 1 Allows for conversion of the RawValue parameter to a coded symbol value such as On or Alarm Value 1 corresponds to the desired Value when RawValue 1 The user may choose from any predefined coded value The default is On Value 2 Similar to Value O0 and Value 1 Value 2 corresponds to the desired Value when RawValue 2 In this case the ChanQuan parameter must be set to 2 in order to define 4 states An example would be a Valve with two limit switches where the states would be Trans Opened Closed and Invalid The default is Undefined Value 3 Similar to Value O amp Value 1 Value 3 corresponds to the desired Value when RawValue 3 In this case the ChanQuan parameter must be set to 2 in order to define 4 states The default is Undefined Reverse Causes the sensing inputs to change from Normally Open to Normally Closed When set to Yes the inputs are treated as Normally Closed contacts When set to No the inputs are treated as Normally Open contacts Default is No Latch Causes the input to be treated as a latching contact When set to Yes momentary digital inputs are latched Each time a contact closure or opening if Reverse Yes is sensed Value will toggle Default is No Filter Specifies the number of consecutive identical samples received before the Value is allowed to change The Filter parameter allows for contact debounce and can be used to prevent a spurious r
55. Remaining Volume 32 bit Register 0035 Temp Floating point value representing the Product Temperature 32 bit Register 0036 AmbientTemp Floating point value representing the Ambient Temperature 32 bit Register 0037 Tb Floating point value representing the Bottom Temperature 32 bit Register 0038 Tm Floating point value representing the Middle Temperature 32 bit Register 0039 Tt Floating point value representing the Top Temperature 32 bit Register 0040 104 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function TimeToFill Floating point value representing the Time to Fill 32 bit Register 0041 FlowRate Floating point value representing the Flow Rate 32 bit Register 0042 RoofMass Floating point value representing the Roof Mass 32 bit Register 0043 HeadPress Floating point value representing the Head Pressure 32 bit Register 0044 Pb Floating point value representing the Bottom Pressure 32 bit Register 0045 Pm Floating point value representing the Middle Pressure 32 bit Register 0046 AvlInventory Floating point value representing the Available Inventory 32 bit Register 0047 Reserved2 Reserved Value 32 bit Register 0048 FlowPeriod Floating point value representing the Flow Period 32 bit Register 0049 RTDI Floating point value representing the RTD Resistance 32 bit Register 0050 Curren
56. TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter The default is C TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is C AllLowRange Analog Input 1 Low Range Varec Inc 135 Remote Terminal Unit Config Parameters Function AllHighRange Analog Input 1 High Range Al2LowRange Analog Input 2 Low Range Al2HighRange Analog Input 2 High Range ValueMin Minimum Analog Input Integer Value ValueMax Maximum Analog Input Integer Value LevelDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Level that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 Mode Parameter used to control the operation of the point 0x02 Communication via FCU Tempinterleave Temperature Interleave Factor determines how often the temperature is read The default is 10 which means that with every tenth scan of the REX the temperature is read BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 The default is 4800 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the com port Valid values include 8N
57. This value is in HH MM SS format For example ValueO will accumulate whenever the value specified by the PntRef matches the CompareO value This timer will continue to run until the PntRef and CompareO no longer match ValueO is reset when the Period expires PrevValue0 3 PrevValue0 3 are the previous period timer totals When the Period expires Value0 3 will be copied into PrevValue0 3 Counter0 3 Counter0 3 are the number of transitions counted for each timer PrevCounter0 3 The number of transitions for the previous Period When the Period expires Counter0 3 will be copied into PrevCounter0 3 Alarm0 3 The status of each timer If the Value for each timer is greater than the AlarmTime the Alarm parameter will be set to Alarm ResetTime The next Period reset time PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The TIMER point allows the user to count and or time events Alarms Pump Control operations Valve operations and Digital status changes are all examples of events that the TIMER point can time The user specifies a PntRef which is stored locally in RefValue Up to four values to compare are a
58. Time in tenths of a second that output will remain active after which it de activates A value of 0 disables pulsing the output i e the output remains active until Value is changed The default is set to O CommfailValue Determines the state of the Value parameter Is used in case of a communication failure ACommunications Watchdog point WDOG must be configured to activate this feature Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 0 Dynamic Parameters Function Value Coded value representing the output value of the channels assigned to the point RawValue Binary number that represents the current value of the channel s assigned to the point PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 3 C
59. Transmitter commands allowing configuration of gauge parameters V Memory is mapped to the Dynamic parameters of each point and C Memory is mapped to the Config parameters of each point V Memory is routinely scanned by the Model 8203 and C Memory is downloaded whenever a parameter is modified in ViewRTU or by the Host system Modbus The Model 8203 can be used as a Modbus interface in conjunction with MIREG MFPREG MBMFT HIU SG6000 TM4590 and MBTX points Each type of point needs some addressing information along with communications parameters in order to provide access to device data using the Modbus protocol MG5000 The Model 8203 communicates using the DDA protocol when MG5000 points are defined Level temperature and water level data are available Configuration and diagnostics are provided through the MG5000 point Varec Inc 37 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Digital Hydrocarbon Probes The Model 8203 will interface to the FCI DHP 485 Digital Hydrocarbon Probe using DHP points Chemical Concentration and temperature data are available using the DHP points Configuration and calibration are also possible Note Refer to the RTU Software Blocks chapter for point description and applications Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Assignment Chart RTU Module Channel Port Connector Terminal Service or Description 1 1 P1 J2 4 5 6
60. Value parameter will be Opened or Closed If both are available both can be used to determine transitional status If no status feedback is available then define a DI point and assign it to the same channel as the OpenLink This will allow the VALVE point to monitor the output command status The OpenLink is usually a DO point which is connected to the valve actuator via a Model 8201 16 Channel Digital 1 0 Module or a Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module Entering a Command of Open will cause valve to open Likewise a Command of Close will cause the valve to close The PositionRef is usually an AI point although any Software Block that produced an IEEE floating point value indicating the valve position 0 100960 can be used Comm Watchdog WDOG The Communications Watchdog point allows the user to enable communications failure ye processing for the 8130 RTU The WDOG point monitors one or more database reference values and if it is determined that the Host is not communicating comm failure processing can be initiated The WDOG point typically monitors the COM points Comm Failure processing affects AO and DO points AO and DO points have a parameter called the CommFailValue When the WDOG point signals all the AO and DO points that communications has failed they respond by setting their output to the CommFailValue If the CommFailValue is 0 or Undefined then no action will take place for that particular point Parameters The da
61. VibrationRef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate based upon other constraints TempRef The Winding Bearing temperature status reference This parameter is used for shutdown lockout logic Normally a DI point is used for this although any type of point that produces a value of Normal can be specified For example an AISTAT point can be used if the signal originates from an Analog Input point If the value of the TempRef is Normal then the pump will be allowed to run If the value of the TempRef is anything other than Normal such as High or Alarm the Command will be Stop and the pump will be shut down If the TempRef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate based upon other constraints PressRef The Suction Pressure status This parameter is used for shutdown lockout logic Normally a DI point is used for this although any type of point that produces a value of Normal can be specified For example an AISTAT point can be used if the signal originates from an Analog Input point If the value of the PressRef is Normal then the pump will be allowed to continue to run If the value of the PressRef is anything other than Normal such as High Low or Alarm the Command will be Stop and the pump will be shut down If the FlowRef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate based upon other constraints The PressDelay is used to holdoff the logic decision so that startup conditions may stabilize
62. Voltage 4000 VAC Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Operating Voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC or 240 VAC Analog Inputs Maximum Quantity 32 Operating Voltage Single ended 0 10 Volts 5 Volts or 10 Volts Operating Voltage Differential 0 10 Volts 5 Volts or 10 Volts Resolution 12 bits Throughput Accuracy 0 01 296 Sample Rate per channel 160 msec Surge Protection Clamping max 28 Volts Maximum Input Voltage 1 msec 1500 Volts peak Maximum Input Current 1 msec 15 Amps peak Surge Response Time 1 picosecond Analog Outputs Maximum Quantity 32 Operating Voltage Single ended 0 10 Volts 5 Volts or 10 Volts Operating Voltage Differential 0 10 Volts 5 Volts or 10 Volts Resolution 16 bits Sample Rate per channel 500 msec Surge Protection Clamping max 28 Volts Maximum Input Voltage 1 msec 1500 Volts peak Maximum Input Current 1 msec 15 Amps peak Surge Response Time 1 picosecond Intelligent Communications Interfaces Tank Gauge communications via intelligent expansion modules Microprocessor based Automatically scans for level temperature and interface level Industry Standard Protocols Modbus TIWAY LON RACKBUS Tank Gauge Interfaces Varec Whessoe Varec Varec Enraf L amp J Saab MTS GSI Texas Instruments Barton Instruments Veeder Root Varec Inc 3 Overview Gas Tube Protection A surge ground is used to provid
63. a Module Installation Refer to the Configuration amp 1 0 Expansion Module Configuration chapters 4 and 5 for procedures Note Before configuring any I O expansion modules 8203 8208 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 8215 8216 and 8217 the dip switch must be set equal to the number to which it is connected on the 8130 RTU i e P1 P2 etc Note Before configuring any 1 0 expansion modules each module must always be installed with the terminal blocks facing outward Recommended Maintenance Procedure The following standard procedure can be used for repairing the 8130 RTU Replacing a defective component or module 1 Turn off main power 2 Open the enclosure door Remove the case cover of the 8130 RTU 18 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Qv MT Replace the defective component or module Replace and tighten the case cover Turn on power and test with Hand Held terminal or main computer Close the enclosure door Varec Inc 19 Installation 20 Installation and Operations Manual 4 Configuration The 8130 RTU is supported by a full range of I O interfaces I O expansion modules are available for connection to almost every type of signal encountered in industrial environments Since wiring to field devices depends on the 1 0 expansion module the procedure will vary for each device The basic 8130 RTU is constructed as a Motherboard with connectors for up to four I O
64. be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High 60 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd A Reset command will deactivate the output Any change in the Value will retrigger alarm processing Value Coded value representing the alarm condition Value can be either Alarm or Normal The Value is derived from the PntRef RawValue The RawValue is the value read from the PntRef If bits are set in both the RawValue and the Filter an alarm condition is detected OutputCmd Current command sent to the OutputLink point Control This parameter is used to enable disable the ControlRef ability to control the DAL output value Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters PntStatus Byte value indic
65. bits Even parity The default is 8N Varec Inc 95 Config Parameters Function TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter in the appropriate VISCAN or MSCAN point TempDeadband The TempDeadband is used to set the Change Of State deadband for temperature The default is 25 degrees FastScanMode Places the AT4530 point in the Fast Scan mode Values are Enable or Disable Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Level Temp Position changes Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 240 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the AT4530 p
66. can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to Al 00 Channel Physical Channel 1 32 A value of 0 disables data scanning for the channel For multi channel devices this is the first channel of the channel sequence The default is to match the Point Name i e 00 Channel 1 Mode Value Conversion Mode 0 Value is IEEE Real calculated using Offset amp Scale default 1 Value is Integer calculated using SYS point parameters AinBias amp AinScale 2 0 10 Volt Range 3 0 5 Volt Range Offset Offset value used in IEEE floating point conversion of RawValue to Value The default is 0 Scale Scale value used in the IEEE floating point conversion of RawValue to Value The default is 100 ValueMin ValueMin can be used to clamp the Value to a minimum value First the Value is calculated using the Offset and Scale parameters If the resultant value is less than the ValueMin the Value is set to the ValueMin Normally you should set the ValueMin to the same value as the Offset ValueMax ValueMax can be used to clamp the Value to a minimum value First the Value is calculated using the Offset and Scale parameters If the resultant value is greater than the ValueMax the Value is set to the ValueMax N
67. detail in the following section Parameter Description Each parameter is defined by its Parameter Class and Data Type The following subsections describe Parameter Classes Parameter Data Formats and Common Parameters Parameter Classes Each parameter such as Value or Channel is classified as one of the following classes Parameter Class Description Config Configuration parameters such as channel numbers tags descriptions ranges operating modes point references constants for formulas and timing information Dynamic Real time data such as the value or the status Dynamic data is calculated or measured during point execution scans which occur every 250 msec Command Output command data Constant Weights amp Measures parameter Scratch Temporary data that is typically hidden from the user System System data should not be changed by the user The user related parameters are the Config Command and Dynamic parameters These parameters are available in the Edit Point window of ViewRTU The remaining parameters are internal to the Software Block ViewRTU inserts default values for the Config parameters when the point is first defined It is usually only necessary to fill in a few configuration parameters such as channel numbers to configure references and to configure links to other points Parameter Data Formats Data is stored in the 8130 RTU as one of the following formats 40
68. enter them To enter an LDI password 1 From the main menu press P The system prompts you to enter a password 2 Enter your Level 1 or Level 2 password and press ENTER H Help P Enter Password Select Mode P Enter Password Figure 10 5 Main Menu Varec Inc 155 Local Diagnostic Interface If the password is incorrect the LDI beeps and displays Access Denied If the password is correct the LDI returns you to the main menu Adding a Point You can create an 8130 RTU point with the LDI just as you can in ViewRTU To add a point to the 8130 RTU using the LDI Interface Adding a Point 1 From the main menu press lt A gt The point type menu appears L SYS 2 COM 3 DIAG 4 CLK 3 LO 6 DI Add Pnt Type Figure 10 6 Add Point Type 2 Press Enter to scroll through the point types 3 Selectthe point type you want to add to the database by pressing its corresponding number from the menu and pressing ENTER The LDI prompts you for the number of the point to add 3 DIAG 4 CLK 5 6 DI Add Pnt Type 6 bo add DI Figure 10 7 Numbering the Point 4 Enter the number and press ENTER If you entered a valid number the LDI adds the point to the 8130 RTU database and displays Point Added on the LDI screen If you entered an invalid number the LDI rejects the number and returns you to the Poi
69. expansion modules Note Refer to the 8130 RTU Installation chapter for guidelines and procedures for using the 8130 RTU in a hazardous location Note The channel numbering will usually be the same regardless of the 1 expansion board Channel 1 begins with the top left connector and Channel 17 begins with the top right connector The I O modules are either single sized 4 5 by 5 1 or double sized 4 5 by 10 3 The I O expansion modules are listed below Model 8201 16 Channel Digital In Out module contacts relays Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface module Modbus MTS PetroSense Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function module contacts relays Pulse Totalizer Analog inputs Model 8205 16 Channel Analog Input module 4 20 mA 1 5V Model 8207 8 Channel Analog Output module 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 1 5V Model 8208 TIWAY Interface module Texas Instruments IT 111 IT 121 IT 150 Model 8210 Varec Mark Space Interface module Mark Space Micro 4 wire Model 1800 Model 1900 Model 4000 2900 FTT Model 8211 Current Loop Interface module Whessoe Bus Protocol GPE Protocol Model 8212 Saab TRL 2 Interface module Model 8213 VI Interface module Varec TGM 3000 TGM 4000 Varec SG6000 Model 8214 Enraf Interface module Enraf 811 802 812 854 873 Model 8215 L amp J Tankway Interface module MCG 1000 MCG 1500 MCG 2000 Model 8216 LON Interface module Barton Instruments Series 3500 Model 8217 Dual RS 232 Interface module Con
70. for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The PUMP point provides status monitoring and control of commonly encountered pump applications The PUMP point provides interface logic for Hand Off Auto switches Bearing Winding temperature monitoring Vibration monitoring as well as flow and pressure monitoring Any or all of these signals may be specified for use with the PUMP point If a signal is not present it can be set to Undefined and it will be ignored The PUMP point allows the user to enter a Start or Stop by changing the Command parameter This causes an On or Off value to be written to the parameter specified by the OutputLink The PUMP point can also perform monitoring of other pump related parameters such as temperature pressure and flow If any of these parameters are outside of defined limits then the pump is shut down Pump operation can also be determined by setting a flow total setpoint so that when the flow total is achieved the pump is stopped The PUMP point also includes a mode where the pump is command to run for a specified period of time Interfacing to Other Points Note The ValueRef must be entered If no status feedback is available then define a DI point and assign it to the same ch
71. in the ReplyData parameter CmdsStatus The status of the Command The SG6000 point will acknowledge receipt of the command by setting the CmdStatus to Start When the command has finished the CmdStatus will be Complete If it is not possible to perform the command the CmdStatus will be Error Level IEEE Floating point value representing the tank level The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point Position Floating point value representing the position of the displacer The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge The Position can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point Temp Floating point value representing the product temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge The Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point Varec Inc 105 Dynamic Parameters Function UpperlntLevel Floating point value representing the upper interface level This data is obtained with a Upper Int Level command The UpperlntLevel can be converted from Metri
72. is accomplished using the Group VPos HPos WriteData ReadData CmdStatus and Command parameters To upload data from the Servo set the Group VPos and HPos parameters to the matrix position of the data item you are interested in Set the Command parameter to Upload to read data from the Servo The response will be written into the ReplyData parameter To download data to the Servo set the Group VPos and HPos parameters to the matrix position of the data item you are interested in Set the WriteData to the value you want to download Set the Command parameter to Download to write data to the Servo Note that in order to Download certain parameters to the Servo the Access Code must be set to the appropriate level i e 50 or 51 After the Upload or Download command is issued the CmdStatus will first go to Start to indicate the operation is under way When the operation is finished the CmdStatus will be Complete If it is not possible to perform the operation the CmdStatus will go to Error Varec Inc 107 EDIT POINT E Point Current Point 0 Desc SG6000 00 Varec 6000 Servo Gauge STG CONFIG Point Tag SG6000 MSeal Weights amp Measures Seal Disable Module External Module Address 1 Chan Channel for Communications 1 ID Tank Gauge ID 0x01 Mode Gauge Scanning Mode 0x0000 LevelUnits F Ft M Meters m millimeters m T empUnits F Fahrenheit C Celsius t DensityUnits G g mL
73. l SSv19 NI Q31VOO1 SINJADQHISNI WOHNJ SIVNOIS LAdNI DO TIVNV WHO 0332X3 1ON 300319313 SNIONnOS9 OL GNNOYD Z S028 NO i SOz8 2 20 8 L 2028 1300W 3ONVISIS3M SYOLONGNOOD GSTIVLSNI 9MvEL LNVONNGSY 9 AJGOYLOSTS INIGNNOYD V OL Q31903NNOO 38 GINOHS Z G0 8 MO 1808 L 2028 1 20 8 1300WN X04 STVNIWH31 ONIGNNONOD LNOYS NOLV201 039934399 NOILV2O1 NOLLVOINGAWOO 0333333Hd LInONOO 5 0338343Hd TWNOIS 300819313 ONIQNnO3N9 OL ava ONnONO LOANNOO Seal 5209 AL33VS INY 04 ONnOND T C3 e Bill NOILV201 83 02 oo oo oo 109 Ov 1ndino 1ndNi 20 O 109 LOVLNOD WYYIY NOISNYLNI 00 2v 08 SI 39VI1OA NOILVOO SnOQNVZVH NON WOWIXVA SHI 6 318vOllddv Sv 232 233 SHL HLIM 3ONVQHOOOV NI 38 ISAW NOILVTIVISNI 8 O3193NNOOSIG SI LNAdNI YO SNOGYVZVH NON 38 OL SI NOILVOOT1 N3HM AINO 535035 3OVv d3M Z SNOGHVZVH NON 38 OL NMON SI Vj V YO 440 GSHOLIMS N3398 SVH 553131 INSNdINOA LOSNNOOSIG LON OG 9 6 NOISIAIG SSvIO X04 ALIIGVLINS AvW SINSNOdWOD 40 NOILNLILSENS ANNSOTONS v YWAN HLIM CASN N3HM NOILV2OT SnOQSVZVH Z NOISIAIG NI OJ3TIVISNI 38 AVN NIY 32018 YAMOd LNdN Ov SNISIM 33MOd VOIdAL 8 1 2018
74. methods are slightly different Adding Multiple Points This section describes how to define a point from either the Main window or the Spreadsheet Mode window Entering Point Data This section describes how to enter a point s parameters Parameters are entered from the Spreadsheet Mode window Creating and Editing Connections This section describes how to create connections between various points Points may be used to retrieve and or deliver data from other points Configuring Single Points Configuring the point involves entering configuration parameters In some cases connections between points must also be required in order to perform a function All of these steps can be implemented from the Point Connections window To display the Point Connections window follow one of the methods listed below Varec Inc Using ViewRTU Adding a Point The user is able to add a point or point type by clicking the Add Point icon from the toolbar or by selecting Add from the Point menu Once the point is added the user is then able to configure the point Defined point types appear in the Point Icon Selection Area and in the Spreadsheet Summary of the main window Entering Point Data This section describes how to configure the parameters of any point Each point has its own Edit Point window that requires some degree of configuration Both the configuration and dynamic attributes of the point are found in the Edit Point Window Fr
75. of parameter value defined in the PntRef TimeOfMHigh Time that the MonthlyHigh occurred MonthlyLow Low value for the month of parameter value defined in the PntRef TimeOfMLow Time that the DailyLowVal occurred DayEnd Time when the daily registers are reset Varec Inc 51 8130 RTU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function MonthEnd Time when the monthly registers are reset RefValue Floating Point value of the PntRef parameter used to determine the Value parameter PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The AIFUNC point continually monitors the value of the PntRef reference and stores the data locally in RefValue It then calculates a Rate of Change based upon the last 10 readings The ScanInterval parameter determines the frequency at which readings are taken from the Pntref The rate is calculated as a weighted sum with the most recent readings having a higher weight In addition to the Rate of Change calculation the AIFUNC point records the high and low values of the day as well as the times at which they occur The times are reset at midnigh
76. or perform debounce filtering Varec Inc 61 8130 RTU Software Blocks The DI point is typically used when a Model 8201 16 Channel Digital 1 0 Module or a Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module is present Parameters The database parameters used by the DI point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to DI 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to DI 00 Channel Physical Channel 1 32 A value of 0 disables data scanning for the channel For multi channel devices this is the first channel of the channel sequence The default is to match the Point Name i e DI OO Channel 1 ChanQuan Total number of physical channels assigned to the point 0 16 The default is 1 Value O0 Allows for conversion of the RawValue parameter to a coded symbol value such as Off or Normal Value 0 corresponds to the desired Value when RawValue 0 The user may choose from any predefined coded value The default is
77. provides the means to connect directly to the TRL 2 bus The Model 8212 is automatically detected at start up and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The user only has to set the Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID parameters in order to establish communications with the RAPTOR The Chan determines which Channel is used for communications to the slave device The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the RAPTOR The RAPTOR point can also be used to communicate with the Rosemont FCU Field Communication Unit by setting the mode parameter to 0x02 and setting the Addr parameters Weights amp Measures Protection The RAPTOR point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameters can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters when unlocked and will be grayed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal to Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point 138 Installation and Operations Manual Saab REX Radar Tank Gauge REX The Saab REX Radar Gauge point provides an interface to Saab REX Radar Gauges The REX point interfaces to Saab 3900 Series REXs using Modbus If communicating directly FEX a to the gauge the REX point executes on the Model 8212 Saab TRL 2 Interface The REX point can also be used with a Saab FCU The Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface MODx_xx fi
78. requests with communications or context errors NumTimeouts Number of requests that did not receive a response NumScanList Number of devices in the Scan List PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MSCAN point provides status information for the communications with any Modbus devices used with the 8130 RTU For the 8130 RTU Motherboard the MSCAN point is created automatically whenever the Modbus Master protocol is defined for a COM point For the Model 8203 the MSCAN point is created at initialization when the Motherboard detects the Model 8203 The point number created will correspond to the following table Module Point Number Model 8203 Module 1 1Chan MSCAN 01 1Chan 2 MSCAN 02 Model 8203 Module 2 Chan 1 MSCAN 03 Chan 2 MSCAN 04 Model 8203 Module 3 Chan 1 MSCAN 05 Chan 2 MSCAN 06 Model 8203 Module 4 Chan 1 MSCAN 07 Chan 2 MSCAN 08 8130 RTU Motherboard Module 0 COM 0 MSCAN 09 COM 1 MSCAN 10 COM 2 MSCAN 11 Use the Upload command from the Config Menu to retrieve the data from the MSCAN point or any other points created automatically by the 8130 RTU The Modbus Master protocol handler works in conjunction with MIREG and MFPREG points The Module and Chan parameters of the MIREG and MFPREG points must correspond with a Modbus 126 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Master protocol handler For example if
79. s saaa ERUIT 104 GSI Model 2000 Modbus Interface 51 105 Parameters i icles valet uA Trae wall wales 105 Varec Inc vii Application i uiae up m ym ox a Pa aie RM RR ACE RE TR UR ca 106 Varec Multi Function Transmitter 107 P rarm eters de ese Ra Rex cee LEE RU TUE HE ge ae 107 pisei 110 Varec Modbus Level Transmitter 113 Parameters oaii xa ERREUR ER Ca Rega ER eee ae RR RR eet 113 Application i ar aa ada ae ROAD R 116 Modbus I O 1 117 Parameters dete dat Care dys Peds rds bee a due wed xe eg e dx 117 Application ss i be ERR Gc RR Rx eR EE E E ea 118 Modbus Floating Point Register MFPREG 119 Parameters i aaia ET 119 Application icia e hes aa Rc a aa a a ee a 120 MTG Tank Gauge Interface MG5000 121 Parameters sss hk Hebe A a RES 121 Yeu 124 Modbus Integer Register 125 Parameters cesis ER kh RE Ee Cae e ete EUR RUE CR eet 125 A TED 126 Modbus Scanner 5
80. tank points only 1 set the LDI to Tank Mode press T from the main menu The LDI lists the tank points TANK 00 01 TANK 02 to edit WN EF Figure 10 17 Tank Points 2 From this point the LDI works just like Edit Point but here you are only working with tank points Varec Inc 161 Local Diagnostic Interface 162 Installation and Operations Manual 11 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the procedures used to isolate hardware faults Three icons and eight status Led provide verification of correct operation If the 8130 RTU is not functioning normally the user is able to troubleshoot the device by performing one or more procedures using the three icons These icons and indicators are also described in the Motherboard amp 1 0 Expansion Module Configuration chapter Troubleshooting the 8130 RTU Motherboard LED Displays Under Normal Conditions Operations are normal if the Run 1 0 and On line indicators are flashing the table below represents the normal conditions for the Run Output and On line indicators Run Communications Online Output Enabled Error Figure 11 1 8130 RTU LED Indicators Indicator Condition Run Flashes once every second Communications Toggles when the system is receiving data Idle when not transmitting data 1 0 Toggles occasionally if intelligent O modules are installed Every transaction with an intellige
81. temporary buffer is determined by the Filter parameter This parameter is only used on the Model 8213 Values can be 0 7 LevelFilter The Filter parameter is used in conjunction with the LevelFilter parameter to determine the reasonableness of the Level value Level data is stored in a temporary buffer A check is made each time a new reading is made by comparing the values in the temporary buffer If the data is within the LevelFilter value of all the values in the buffer the data is considered to be reasonable and it is accepted into the Level parameter The number of samples stored in the temporary buffer is determined by the Filter parameter This parameter is only used on the Model 8213 This parameter has the same units as the Level parameter Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when a Value Changes State Parameter values can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low Default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default
82. the RTU RTU RTU LDI changes the RTU point LDI grants or denies ability to change database The Edit Tags menu gives you access to the same data as Edit Point But with Edit Tags you only edit points that contain an existing tag Figure 10 1 Overview of the LDI Menus Varec Inc 153 Local Diagnostic Interface LDI Environment LDI Screen The LDI Screen is a small 4X20 character screen that displays menus database points and help When you first activate the LDI it displays the title screen This screen shows the 8130 RTU version number To display the main menu from the title screen press any key on the keypad H Help P Enter Password Select Mode P Enter Password Figure 10 2 LDI Main Menu Screen LDI Keypad You can select menu options and enter data with the LDI keypad The LDI keypad contains 30 keys with 27 containing secondary functions These secondary functions include numbers punctuation and other characters To enter a secondary function press lt SHIFT gt before pressing the key For example to enter the number 1 press SHIFT then H n n m 2 lt o C SHIFT SPACE Figure 10 3 LDI Keypad There are cases when the LDI will only accept numbers as valid entry In these cases you do not have to press lt SHIFT gt The LDI accepts the number value of the keys you press 154 Installation and Operations
83. the RTG and sends the response back to the 8130 RTU The ID is used and the Addr parameter is ignored This mode is sometimes referred to as pass through mode Weights amp Measures Protection The RTG point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameters can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters Varec Inc 147 when unlocked and will be greyed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal to Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point 148 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Varec 6000 Servo Gauge STG Interface SG6000 The SG6000 point provides an interface to Varec 6000 Servo Tank Gauge transmitter This point provides level temperature interface and density data Other information such as point and gauge status is also available in this software block The SG6000 point can execute on a Model 8203 MODx xx firmware a Model 8211 WB3 20 firmware or on a Model 8213 V1 x xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the SG6000 point are listed and described below Config Constant Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Tank 22 The default tag is set to 5G6000 00 WMSeal Coded valu
84. the most significant bit MSB while switch SW1 8 is the least significant bit LSB When a switch is in the ON or CLOSED position the resulting bit is a one Varec Inc 15 Installation ON OFF Figure 3 3 Switch SW 1 setting for ID 1 Mounting the Enclosure The recommended standard housing for the 8130 RTU is a NEMA TYPE 4 enclosure This enclosure is suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications Wiring Up Power The user has the option of either connecting to AC or DC power Wiring 120 or 220 VAC Power The 8130 RTU is powered by an isolation transformer with a 24 volt regulator 1 Remove cover Connect the two power leads to terminals L and N of connector J3 Ensure that a ground connection is connected to the G terminal ground of connector J3 gt Install cover Wiring 24 VDC Power 1 Connect 24V to terminal 8 of connector J2 2 Connect 24V Common to terminal 7 of connector J2 3 Connect earth ground to the G terminal ground of connector J3 Grounding To allow use in harsh industrial environments the 8130 RTU incorporates ANSI IEEE surge protection In solid state control systems grounding helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMI and provides additional surge protection when high voltage switching circuits are connected to the unit The grounding path for the 8130 RTU and its enclosure is provided by the equipment grounding connector Groundin
85. this feature to work Set the FlowSetPoint to O to disable this feature Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 120 Dynamic Parameters Function Command Pump Command Valid values are Start and Stop Control The Control parameter enables or disables operation of the pump Value The current Pump status specified by the ValueRef AlarmStatus If the pump is shut down due to an alarm condition the AlarmStatus will be set to Alarm Refer to the OpCondition for a more information If the pump was stopped by the operator or stopped due to the FlowSetPoint or the TimeToStop the AlarmStatus will be Normal The AlarmStatus is available for use as a reference to other Software Blocks CommandTime Time of the last command The Com
86. to Normal Interfacing to Other Points The AAL point can be used in conjunction with almost any point that produces a floating point data value Typical examples are the Analog Input Al and TankGate points The typical OutputLink is a Digital Output DO point The ControlRef can be any type of point that produces a parameter value of Enable and Disable Typical examples are Digital Input DI and Digital Converter DICONV points The AAL point is not limited to these types of points and can be used to solve a variety of problems Analog Inputs Al The Analog Input point interfaces to analog input signals such as temperatures aT pressures flow rates and levels The Al point converts the raw data from the A D or V f converter into an IEEE floating point format A software filtering algorithm may be applied to condition noisy signals The AI point can be used with the Model 8204 Multi Function Module or the Model 8205 16 Channel Analog Input Module 48 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Parameters The database parameters used by the AI point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to Al 00 Description The point description
87. to monitor The AISTAT point interfaces to floating point data values 52 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function TripLow Low Trip value If the PntRef value is less than or equal to the TripLow value then the Value parameter will be set to ValueLow TripHigh High Trip value If the PntRef value is greater than or equal to the TripHigh value then the Value parameter will be set to ValueHigh ValueNormal If the PntRef Value RefValue is between the TripLow and TripHigh parameters then the Value parameter will be set to the ValueNormal value The default is Normal ValueLow If the PntRef Value RefValue is less than or equal to the TripLow parameter value then the Value parameter will be set to the ValueLow value The default is Low ValueHigh If the PntRef Value RefValue is greater than or equal to the TripHigh parameter value then the Value parameter will be set to the ValueHigh value The default is High Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a
88. to that reference point s Point Connections window Exit The Exit icon exits the current point configuration and returns the user to the main menu Download The Download icon allows the user to download the entire point data to the 8130 RTU Upload The Upload icon allows the user to upload the entire point data from the 8130 RTU Modifying Values Cepit Boint Point Help Current Point fo Point Desc VALVE 00 Valve Status Control Point Tag VALVE 00 Description Point Description VALVE_00 Limit Switch Reference Undefined ClosedRef Closed Limit Switch Reference Undefined HOARef Hand Off Auto Reference Undefined PositionRef Valve Position Reference Undefined IMode perating Mode Hold DataMode OpCondition Offset 0 ICoastDown Reverse Command Coastdown 00 00 10 TransTimeOut Transition Time Max 00 02 00 Iw Open Close Stop Reverse Setpoint Position Setpoint 0 0 LastCommand Last Operator Command Undefined CommandTime Last Command Time Tue Jan 01 00 00 00 1980 Value Valve Status Undefined OpCondition Operating Condition 0 HOAValue Hand Off Auto Status Undefined ValvePosition Valve Position 0 0 PntStatus Point Status 0 Elapse Time of Last Update Tue Jan 01 00 00 00 1980 Minimize Next Examine Download Connections Previous Exit Upload i Figure 8 25 Edit Point Dialog Adding a Value To modify a value Double click the de
89. used if necessary The Addr parameter specifies the data address The corresponding PntRef parameter specifies the database parameter for the request The Gateway Block point allows the user to use the 8130 RTU easily in retro fit applications It is not necessary to re configure an existing MMI or Host system The user can configure the 8130 RTU to match the addresses used in the Host system When the Modbus Slave protocol handler receives a request it searches the GWBLK points to determine if any of the Addr parameters match the request If a match is found the data referenced by the PntRef parameter will be used for the response There are three data modes DataMode 0 which returns the data in the default format and DataMode 1 which returns the data in an integer format DataMode 1 will scale IEEE floating point data to an integer value using the Offset Scale ValueMin and ValueMax parameters If DataMode 4 the data will be scaled to an integer by multiplying the data value times the Scale parameter The DataMode can also control if the data is changed to OxFF if the data is invalid The Filter parameter is compared to the PntStatus of the PntRef parameter If bits in the PntStatus match bits in the Filter the data is considered invalid and the a read from a modbus host will result in the data being set to OxFF When Block Read or Write requests are received then the way in which the Modbus Slave protocol handler responds is determine
90. 0 MG5000 compatible tank gauges are connected according to the following diagram Power Supply 24 26 VDC 16 24 AWG or Heavier Twisted Pair cable with Shield Tank side Earth Gnd Tank side Earth Gnd Non Hazardous Location Hazardos Location DDA Compatible Probe DDA Compatible 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Probe 1 1 Figure 5 8 Model 8203 MG5000 Application 36 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Digital Hydrocarbon Probes The following diagram shows how to connect the Model 8203 to DHP 485 probes Power Supply Common und Non Hazardous Hazardous Location Location Safety Barrier 6 Data Data A Data B Data B D PWR SHLD 40 GND GND V SHLD PWR iJ o H 77 DHP 485 DHP 485 Probe Probe KA 20 Q Connection Chart Female Signal Pins Color 0 Data 1 White Data B 2 Green Power 3 Red Pin configuration Ground 4 Black Viewed from mating end of Shield 5 Yellow female connector Figure 5 9 Model 8203 Digital Hydrocarbon Probes Application Software Interface TIWAY The Model 8203 is used as a TIWAY interface in conjunction with T1111 T1121 and TI150 points These points provide access to the Tank Gauge
91. 0 RTU Motherboard A detailed description of the Modbus Master and Modbus Slave protocol handlers follows Modbus Master When connecting to slave devices using the 8130 RTU Motherboard COM 0 COM 1 or COM 2 the Modbus Master protocol handler is enabled by setting the Protocol parameter of a COM point to Modbus Master For the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface the Modbus Master is automatically enabled An MSCAN point is automatically created to provide user access to the operation of the protocol handler The Modbus Master protocol handler uses Modbus Integer Register Software Blocks MIREG and Modbus Floating Point Register points MFPREG to scan data from Modbus slave devices Each MIREG and MFPREG point is responsible for communicating to a slave device For each slave device being scanned there must be a corresponding MIREG or MFPREG point Multiple points may be used to scan a single device The user specifies data addresses and block sizes for requesting data from slave devices The MIREG and MFPREG points are processed sequentially and data is requested from the slave device In addition to the generic MIREG and MFPREG Software Blocks there are Software Blocks that are customized for Modbus communications to specific devices These include the MBMFT MBTX and RTG Software Blocks Modbus Slave The Modbus Slave protocol handler is enabled by setting the Protocol parameter of a COM point to Modbus Slave The Modbus Slave protocol han
92. 00 and 19200 The default is 19200 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8b 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N ID Physical Address of the Allen Bradley Module ReadCmd Command used to Read data from the Allen Bradley Usually 3 or 4 Default is 3 WriteCmd Command used to Write data to the Allen Bradley Usually 5 or 6 Default is 6 Addr1 Data Address and Size This is the register data read from the Allen Sizel Bradley Module Addr is the register start address The Sizel parameter determines how many values are read Default is 8 The values can be seen in the Value1 8 parameters Consult the Allen Bradley documentation for more information Addr2 These parameters are used to send data to the Configuration Registers Value 2 of the Allen Bradley Module They are written to the Allen Bradley as Add 3 soon as communication is established AddrX determines the Address of d the point while Value X is the actual data written to AddrX For more Value 3 information on the configuration registers consult the Allen Bradley Addr4 documentation Value_4 Offset Input range offset used for scaling the input values Scale Input range scale used for scaling the input values ValueMin Output range offset used for scaling the output values ValueMax Output ra
93. 1 then connect an RS 232 cable from a PC with ViewRTU to J5 COMO Power up the unit The CPU indicator should flicker and the PC should display the sign on message that provides the software version number the date and time it was created If the CPU indicator is not Varec Inc 17 Installation flickering or the PC does not display the sign on message turn off system power and proceed with the Troubleshooting and Calibration chapter Establishing Host Communications When the main system power is turned on the Host communications status is set to On line by default The 8130 RTU then waits for a valid poll from the Host computer If the communication cable is installed and the Host is running a communications link is established Verify this condition with a hand held terminal or ViewRTU Verifying Host Communications Display the COM Point and verify that an On line condition is indicated Configuring I O Expansion Modules The 8130 RTU is supported by a full range of I O interfaces I O expansion modules are available for connection to almost every type of signal encountered in industrial applications U U He 8130 1 SY m 3 58 Channel 17 Ems MEg 16 gi bg mai mS Channel 32 Eg Soe p r RS n A Figure 3 5 Example of
94. 30 RTU can connect to virtually every type of signal encountered in industrial environments The 8130 RTU can also interface to Host systems using a variety of system protocols Hardware Description The 8130 RTU consists of an enclosure power supply pluggable termination points high performance 16 bit microcomputer communication subsystems and a full complement of analog and digital input output circuitry The basic 8130 is constructed as a Motherboard with connectors for to four I O expansion modules The 1 0 modules are either single sized 4 5 by 5 1 or double sized 4 5 by 10 3 These modules are described and illustrated in Chapter 5 1 0 Expansion Module Configuration The 8130 RTU motherboard is seen below 60 Om 099 at IEH 0 0 90 alll E 4 ho 10 Og 2 x qd E 7 i O5 Assembly 012259 m BOB 9 m E EI ET i s gu 1 T Bi Ea uU En 0 p So a S3 B sl e OO
95. 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bites Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the value changes state Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High MaxTime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the Raptor point on the Model 8212 and verifies it is scanning gauges If the Model 8212 fails the 0x4000 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Function Level IEEE Floating point value representing the tank level The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Installation and Operations Manual 8203 Dynamic Parameters Function GaugeStatu
96. 8130 RTU Software Blocks configuration and control of communications with TankView or System IV The baud rate and data link parameters are set in the COM point as well The default is 9600 8 data bits No parity The EMUGW point keeps track of the number of requests and number of errors associated with the EMU Slave protocol The current tank number ID and the point associated with the tank number LevelRef are updated as requests from TankView are processed The PntRefs correlate to the SYS ADR parameter in TankView or IDs in System IV Floating Point Register FPREG The Floating Register point provides four bytes of storage in IEEE floating point format m It is often used for inter point communications where no other means is provided Parameters The database parameters used by the FPREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value Real 4 bytes value Gateway Block GWBLK Gateway Block point is used for compatibility with Modbus Master devices The 8130 8130 RTU has no fixed Modbus register Rather the user configures GWBLK to function as a look up table The GWBLK point lets the user specify which point references will respond to data addresses in the request from a Host The GWBLK point contains a cross reference table for database parameters and data addresses Parameters The database parameters used by the GWBLK point are listed and de
97. 86 The Tank Gauge Configurator Menu 187 The File Menu i iae pe eos cet oe got ftu rais ds 187 The Point Men s sa mis ue ame RR ERU Rh Ri RR e d daa 188 The Config Menu 189 The Communications 192 The Options Menu is x Rok RR Rx RR RR DR RR aa E DAR m e RR Re Rcs 194 The Help Men 2 eer t aer wh taeda amend eee eek a iR Renta 195 Using Tank Gauge 196 Configuring Tank Gauge Configurator 196 Configuring Multiple Tank Gauge Configurator 201 Entering Tank Gauge Configurator Point Data 201 The Options 205 Local Diagnostic Interface 207 EDIEnvironmeht scd Peek pein ie 208 EDLS6r6en ved kp E REA E RE b UR ACRI 208 EDI Keypad natara Ue aide Boa ei na aue Rr se 208 Navigating the LDI 1 2 0 llle 209 Help Screens rete ital aie Pc RR E xr Haag ee ley tale actua LS ade 209 Varec Inc EDI F nctloris fer dela eee bs tut ite NET eeu ed 209 Entering a 5
98. A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Tank 22 The default tag is set to AT4530 00 Module The Module parameter determines where the AT4530 point will execute The AT4530 point can be used with either a Model 8203 a Model 8213 or a Model 8217 Valid values are 1 4 A value of 255 disables scanning Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For a Model 8213 Chan is 1 through 4 For a Model 8203 or a Model 8217 Chan is either 1 or 2 The Device ID of the SG6000 Servo or TM4590 Tank Side Monitor connected to the Prothermo Mode Parameter used to control the operation of the AT4530 point It has different meanings depending on whether the Model 8203 or the Model 8213 is used Model 8203 or Model 8217 Reserved for Future Use Model 8213 0x0200 NMT is connected to an TM4590 BaudRate Model 8203 or Model 8217 Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 The default is 9600 Model 8213 Sets the V1 protocol pulse width If the ClockRate is set to 00 then the pulse width is approx 303 uS 1 3300 BPS The default is 99 Comms Params Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the AT4530 Examples include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data
99. Connect Figure 8 15 The Communications Menu PC Setup The PC Setup option allows the user to define the communications channel and data rate characteristics of the communications port When selected the following dialog box appears This example dialog box contains the default settings for communications setup RTU Address 1 Port COME I Use RTS Use CTS Baud Rate 300 C1200 C2400 4800 9600 14400 38400 Data Bits Parity SS ee oF None Stop Bits F Odd f Even ey C2 Data Scan Enabled Auto Connect At Start Up Number of Retries 3 Auto Download Time Timeout x 100ms Download Firmware Timeout x 100ms 600 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP E3 Figure 8 16 Port Communications Setup Dialog Port Communications Setup dialog This dialog box allows the user to enter the specifications of the 8130 RTU s communication port When OK is selected the setup data is stored as the default setup next time ViewRTU is executed Status The Status option is provided so the user is able to observe communications data The following dialog box appears when this option is selected Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Figure 8 17 Communications Diagnostics Dialog Connect The Connect option is used when the user needs to search for a specific 8130 RTU The following dialog box appears when the option is selected Figure 8 18 8130 RTU
100. Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to ALSEL 00 Mode Operational mode for the ALSEL Valid choices are Alarm Low LowLow High and HiHi PntRef1 16 The input point reference for the ALSEL point to monitor The ALSEL point interfaces to coded data types Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd Command to reset the alarm Value The Value will be set to Off This command can be used to acknowledge the alarm condition and re arm it after the alarm condition has returned to Normal Value Coded value re
101. I O Expansion Modules DC power 4 slotted mounting connections J2 holes to accommodate Intrusion alarm installation connector AC power gt connection J3 Module cover I O expansion module I O expansion module Communications N connections for b RS 485 COM 1 and 2 optional HARTG communications interface J4 RS 232 COM0 2 connections J8 J10 communications connections J5 J7 Figure 3 1 8130 RTU with Two Communications Boards 14 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Mounting the 8130 RTU Before mounting the 8130 RTU make certain that the enclosure can house the 8130 RTU Refer to the dimensional drawing below all dimensions are in inches secondary dimensions in millimeters Primary dimensions shown in inches 9 5 241 Figure 3 2 8130 RTU Dimension Drawing Supplied in the enclosure is a hardware kit for mounting the 8130 RTU Main Circuit Board The Subpanel has tapped mounting holes to accommodate installation of the 8130 RTU Mounting the 8130 RTU inside the enclosure Mount the 8130 RTU onto the subpanel using the 6 32 x 0 5 panhead screws Select the appropriate Unit address on SW1 the Device ID DIP Switch Switch SW1 sets the 8130 RTU s one byte binary address 0 255 Switch SW1 1 is
102. IOMO39GVAE2513 8203 Dual RS 485 MODBUS Communication Interface Module 8203 Remote Terminal Unit m 1 150 RTU Firmware Version RTU3 xx T mmh D D 5 9 3 2 ie 9 r T D D Automation Solutions for oil amp gas defense and aviation applications 8203 Copyright rights reserved Printed in the United States of America Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of the Publisher Varec Inc 5834 Peachtree Corners East Norcross Atlanta Georgia 30092 Phone 770 447 9202 Fax 770 662 8939 Trademarks Acknowledged Varec Inc recognizes all other trademarks Trademarks of other products mentioned in this manual are held by the companies producing them Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated MODBUS is a registered trademark of Modicon Inc TIWAY is a registered trademark of Texas Instruments Corporation HART interface is a registered trademark of HART Communications
103. MSTX that operate in Modbus mode Model 4000 Tank gauge transmitters are connected directly to a Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Model 8203 Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 2 etc If the Module parameter is set to 0 the MBTX point will use one of the communications channels on the 8130 Motherboard The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Model 4000 MSTX An MBTX point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU The ID must match the unit address of the Model 4000 MSTX Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the Model 4000 MSTX The communications parameters are set as each MBTX point is processed This allows slaves with different baud rates and data link settings to exist on the same bus this practice is allowed but not recommended The MBTX point works in conjunction with the Modbus Master protocol handler If a Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module fitted with the Modbus Master firmware MSCAN points are automatically created and the user only has to set the Module Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID param
104. Manual Remote Terminal Unit 1 Secondary Function Primary Function Figure 10 4 Primary and Secondary Functions Navigating the LDI There are a few basic functions to remember when navigating through the LDI system To scroll through menu options or lists press lt ENTER gt To go back 1 choice screen or step press lt BKSP gt To return to the previous menu press lt ESC gt To continue after receiving an error message press lt ENTER gt Help Screens There are help screens that exist in the LDI These screens review some of the information in this document and provide an overview of the LDI and its functions To reach these screens press H from the main menu Press ENTER to scroll through the help screens LDI Functions The LDI lets you perform many tasks to the 8130 RTU The LDI is ideal for simple additions deletions updates and edits You can do them out in the field without a PC However for more complicated changes we suggest that you use the ViewRTU software Entering a Password To make database changes in the LDI you must have either the Level 1 or Level 2 password Without a password you can only view the 8130 RTU data Level 1 gives you full access to the 8130 RTU database The LDI will prompt you to confirm your database changes before making them Level 2 gives you full access to the 8130 RTU database The LDI immediately makes the database changes as you
105. No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the RTG point on the Model 8212 and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the Model 8212 fails the 0x4000 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Function Level Floating point value representing the tank level The Level will be presented in decimal feet GaugeStatus Integer value indicating status of the gauge Integer Register 6 Values are 0x0001 Bad Level 0x0002 Bad Temp 0x0004 Bad EE 0x0008 Bad EE Checksum 0x0010 Bad RAM 0x0020 Bad EEPROM 0x0040 Local Modifications 0x0080 No Calculation 0x0100 CFG Error 0x0200 Calc Error 0x0400 Bad CPU Board 0x0800 Bad Comm Board 0x1000 Low Encoder Battery Rate Level Rate TankLevel Tank Level Ullage Ullage Analog Analog Current 1 Analog2
106. O expansion one channel can be used for peer to peer communications with other 8130 RTU s or master slave communications to remote 1 COM amp 2 RS 485 J8 J10 RS 485 is the other type of high speed serial communications channels available to interface to Host or Slave systems Both channels may be used simultaneously for increased throughput and redundancy The RS 485 can be used in multi drop configurations Surge ground J9 The surge ground is used to provide surge protection for R 485 communications by using combination of Gas Discharge Tubes and Transzorbs Refer to Chapter 1 for more information about gas discharge tubes 8130 RTU Communications Cable The layout for the RS 232 cable between the PC and the 8130 RTU is described in the following table PC Connector DB 9 Female 8130 RTU Connector DB 9 Male PIN Signal PIN Signal 2 Received Data 3 Transmitted Data 3 Transmitted Data 2 Received Data 5 Signal Ground 5 Signal Ground 30 Installation and Operations Manual 5 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Features Dual high speed communications channels Optically isolated Up to 32 devices per channel ANSI IEEE surge protection Communications with Varec SG6000 Servo gauges using Modbus protocol Communications with Varec Model 4000 MSTX Model 4200 MBMFT and Model 2900 FTT using Modbus protocol Communications with MG5000 using MTS
107. OGDUS s irr RR ee ERRARE Yd dE MS AS es UR A UU US I READ ACRES 34 TIWAY Interfaces od s a peres sem Reto ee UR Read 35 MGB5000 lt 4 essed tee hed eR eR nx RE NUR E IER edd 36 Digital Hydrocarbon 5 36 Software Interface esrin traio eee tenets 37 IWAN doe E RIS Peet Ea 37 Modbus OTI 37 MGB50005 RR Sox E wea Ge deii tue RU 37 Digital Hydrocarbon 5 37 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Assignment Chart 37 6 8130 RTU Software 39 Pesoton p EcL 39 Database 40 Point Formats eae n peor RP e Re a Resear ey Vo e d Li 40 Parameter Description ii le seh ei Rx pep ek Ra RR RR RR IRE ER 40 Gathering Point 42 Standard Request Response Format 42 Change of State 42 RR een OD RO M UR a e e e B reir ee utet 43 Output Registers bis baa Tea RIS a 44 Modbus Communications 000 cece 44 Modbus Masters s ee vx E AR sae EE X RH SAA tes ARR RUN 44 vi Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit
108. OutputLink If no match is found no action is taken If Mode 1 the RawValue is used The CMNDR performs a bit comparison of the RawValue with the Filter When the logical AND of the RawValue and Filter is found the corresponding Command is written to the OutputLink The Control parameter can be used to disable processing When the Control parameter is set to Enable or Undefined processing is enabled If Control is Disable no processing is done The ControlRef parameter may be used to automatically update the Control parameter based upon another point reference Varec Inc 57 8130 RTU Software Blocks Interfacing to Other Points The CMNDR point can be used in conjunction with almost any point that produces an integer or coded data value An example is the Digital Input DI points The typical OutputLink is a Digital Output DO point although it could be any coded parameter in the database The ControlRef can be any type of point that produces a parameter value of Enable and Disable Typical examples are Digital Input DI and Digital Converter DICONV points The CMNDR point is not limited to these types of points and can be used to solve a variety of problems Communications COM The Communications point reports the status and controls the operation of the communications interfaces COM points are automatically created by the system at initialization Parameters The database parameters used by the COM
109. Protocol Communications with FCI Digital Hydrocarbon Probe DHC 485 Communications with Texas Instruments IT 111 IT 121 IT 150 and IT 160 tank gauges using TIWAY or CIM protocol The Model 8203 can communicate with a variety of devices There are several versions that use different firmware One version is available to communicate using the Modbus protocol Other versions communicate to magnetostrictive probes and leak detection devices X Ii n Module 1 Module 3 Module 2 oo AE Module 4 Figure 5 1 RTU with four Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Modules Four daughter boards are shown installed on the RTU The channel order and number of the 8203 depend upon the placement on the motherboard Note that the order starts from the top left and ends at the bottom right Each board contains two communication channels As seen in the above diagram Modules 1 amp 2 are always located on the left side of the motherboard Modules 3 amp 4 are found on the right side Description The components of the 8203 are illustrated in the following figure This section explains how to connect field wiring and how to configure jumper settings Varec Inc 31 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface ID DIP Switch SW1 LED indicators D1 D4
110. RL 2 Communications Interface Module is used to directly connect to the DAU over the TRL 2 bus Parameters The database parameters used by the DAU point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to DAU 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to DAU 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8212 or Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number to which the DAU is connected On the Model 8212 or Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 Physical Address of the Data Acquisition Unit 0 999 Addr FCU Address if Mode 0x02 Mode Operational Mode Values are 0x01 Swap Mode 0x02 Communication via FCU 0x04 Read REX Temperature 0x08 FCU Read 0x8000 Data Addresses 0x10 SAAB Swap Mode 0x80 ASCII Mode BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the DAU device Valid values are 1200 2400 and 4800 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used
111. Ref1 PntRef8 parameters If the Level read from the LevelRef is above a particular level constant Level1 Level8 constant then the associated reference value RefValuel RefValue8 is included in the calculation The SIGSEL point is useful when multiple sources of input are available and the user wants to effect control based upon the average minimum or maximum of those values An example is a Bulk Storage Tank where there are several temperature sensors The user can perform volume correction calculations and use the average of three or four sensors The LevelRef is defined as the tank level associated with a tank gauge interface point The Level constants Level1 Level8 define the heights of the temperature sensors installed on the tank The temperature values 86 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit RefValuel RefValue8 are used in the calculation if their Level constant Level1 Level8 is below the current Level value Interfacing to Other Points The SIGSEL point can be used in conjunction with any points that produce floating point data values Typical examples are the Analog Input and TankGate points System Information SYS Parameters The System Information Point lists the hardware and software specifications of the system Other information includes the hardware version and any connected devices The database parameters used by the SYS point are listed and described below C
112. SG6000 MG5000 MTSx xx DDA MG5000 DHPx xx FCI DHP 34 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Hardware Interface Modbus The following diagram shows how to use the Model 8203 with Modbus devices such as the Varec MBMFT and MSTX Power Supply VAREC QUUM VAREC VAREC Modal 4100 Model 4000 ATT Model 2900F TT Common 48 VDC B T82 B 55 90 0 60 5 c1Q 52 EIA4854 EIA485 gy C 20 4 4 lt lt 12 B EIA485 d 1 485 Terminate with bias resistor 120 ohm on farthest device from the RTU if required Earth Switch selectable on N2900 Gnd 52 eD Q Figure 5 6 Model 8203 Modbus Application TIWAY Interface The following diagram illustrates the TIWAY application of the Model 8203 In this example channel A of the Model 8203 is connected to a mixture of TI 111 TI 121 and TI 150 tank gauge transmitters Varec Inc 35 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Cy Cy AW Di O Qr 0 Di Cn Di Di Black Terminal Black Terminal Black Terminal Black Terminal Block Block Block Block Figure 5 7 Model 8203 TIWAY Application The last transmitter on the communication network should be terminated Refer to the transmitter user s manual for more information MG500
113. Search Dialog 8130 RTU Search Dialog This dialog box lists the address description and current status of each 8130 RTU From this dialog box the user can select an 8130 RTU and establish communications with the selected 8130 RTU Varec Inc 111 Using ViewRTU The Options Menu C ViewRTU Test rcf BAX File Point Config Communications Options Download Firmware Convert Configuration Files Export All Import All View I O List View Weights and Measures List Set Time in RTU Configure Tank Gauges Edit Strap Tables Create Strap Table HEX File Figure 8 19 The Options Menu Convert Configuration Files The Convert Configuration Files option is used once the Download Firmware option has been executed This option converts configuration files from one version to another When selected the following dialog box appears CONVERT RTU FILES Files to convert Analyze Conversion Freewave RCF Version 3 18 Version 3 161 Version 3 17 Version 2 342 Version 2 342 Version 2 342 Script File NONE PierTK rcf Converted Figure 8 20 Convert ViewRTU Versions Dialog Convert ViewRTU Versions Dialog This dialog box allows the user to convert a file The user has the option of first analyzing the effects of converting the file A script file can also be selected to alter the behavior of the conversion Script files are provided on the upgrade dis
114. Spreadsheet Mode Viewing Selected Parameter Types Dialog The user is able to select any combination of parameter types The user is able to select any combination of classifications The classifications are described briefly below Varec Inc 127 Using ViewRTU Parameter Type Description Dynamic Real time data such as status Config General specifications such as tag and description Constant Data that does not change and or can not be changed Scratch Temporary data that is typically hidden from the user Command Output command data System System data should not be changed by the user Note The default View setting is the Config parameter type Hide Row Col The Hide Row Col option allows the user to hide selected rows or columns Note The Copy and Paste operations do not affect hidden rows and columns 1 Select one or more rows or columns 2 Select the Hide Row Col option from the Options menu The selected rows or columns are indicated by a in the row or column buttons heading The following dialog box illustrates this feature C SPREADSHEET MODE z Point Edit Options Value 3 Reverse Latch Filter Report Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High Off No No 2 High s Figure 8 40 Spreadsheet Mode Hiding Columns The user can unhide a row or column by clicki
115. Structure I O Module 5 223 Ordering Structure Expansion Modules 224 Installation and Operations Manual 1 Overview The 8130 RTU is a member of Varec s complete line of industrial control systems and products The 8130 RTU is primarily designed for applications where a cost effective control system is needed for remote collection of field data and control of equipment The 8130 RTU is ideally suited for Tank Farm Terminal Pipeline and Refinery applications It is an effective solution used in SCADA or stand alone programmable control unit applications Features General Complete Computer Control System Division 11 certified system FM CSA consult factory and Control Drawing Inputs are reported to Host Computer by Exception or Scanned Poll Built in Software Function Library Surge Protection Conforming to ANSI IEEE C37 90a 1974 Host Communication via RS 232 RS 485 radio modem or fiber optic link Industry Standard Protocols HART Modbus LON TIWAY Stand Alone Programmable Control Built in Operator Interface Variety of I O Interfaces Al AO DI DO Quick Disconnect I O Terminations Modular Construction for Optimum Expandability Non Volatile Database CMOS Memory Optional Battery Backup for Uninterrupted Operation Intrusion Alarm Power Fail Monitoring Applications Low Low Low High and High High alarms Pressure temperature leve
116. TU LED Indicators under Abnormal Conditions Indicator Condition Cause Solution Run Does not flash Bad database Perform Hard Reset then reload even after hard Bad main circuit database reset board Replace main circuit board Flashes rapidly No firmware or Check jumper settings for firmware is corrupt memory on motherboard Download the firmware again Steady ON OFF system failure 164 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Indicator Condition Cause Solution Communication Steady state DIP switch setting Check unit ID DIP switch setting set ID number and reset system COM point Check COM point with diagnostics terminal or ViewRTU COM parameters Verify time out baud and protocol parameters have the correct values set bad Check for bad communication communications line modem board or main circuit board wrong jumper Check W6 amp W7 for proper settings settings 24 bad fuse Check fuse at F2 Using the 8130 RTU icons Reinitializing System Hardware To reinitialize the system hardware 1 Press the RESET Switch This action causes it to go to a known starting state This switch may be pressed at any time however the following will also occur Reinitialize System Hardware Clear Working Memory Reinitialize Data Base Reset All Timers Disable Outputs Enable Communications Present Sign on Message to Diagnostic Terminal Perfor
117. TU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function Value IEEE Floating Point based upon the point s Offset amp Scale parameters or Integer conversion of RawValue scaled based upon SYS point s AinBias and AinScale parameters Mode determines either Floating Point or Integer RawValue 12 bit raw data value from the A D converter PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No Error 1 Overrange 2 Underrange 3 Configuration change 4 Configuration checksum error Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The Analog Scanner runs every 20 msec and reads the value from the A D converter The Analog Scanner data is stored in an array which is then analyzed periodically by the AI point Stored Value TiME ms l __ 400 650 900 1150 B Analog Scanner readings VO Module data Analog input Al point execution Scanner array The Filter is applied to the Analog Scanner data array For example if the Filter is set to 3 then 3 successive readings are averaged when the Value is calculated Interfacing to Other Points The Al is often used as the input source a Reference for other point application programs The Analog Alarm AAL Analog Totalizer ATOT Analog Status AISTAT and Min Max Average SIGSEL points are examples of points that use AI point data to calculate other data value
118. TankView System Addresses 1 50 EMU 1 is associated with System Addresses 51 100 A EMU Gateway EMUGW point is automatically created when the protocol for a COM point is set to TSU Slave EMU Gateway EMUGW m 00 E o The EMU Gateway point is used to manage scanning functions for the EMU point Statistics are maintained for the communications between the Series 8130 and the I tank gauging software TankView or System IV Special firmware is required on the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module to support the emulation functions 68 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Parameters The database parameters used by the EMUGW point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Protocol Protocol to emulate Valid values are TSU Slave ID Address to respond to Mode Operational Mode BaudRate Baud Rate used to communicate with TankView The default is 1200 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the com port Examples include ID Address to respond to Mode Operational Mode BaudRate Baud Rate used to communicate with TankView ComParamsDefines the number of data bits and the parity used by the com port Examples include 80 8 Data Bits Odd Parity 8E 8 Data Bits Even Parity 8N 8 Data Bits No Parity 70 7 Data Bits Odd Parity 7E 7 Data Bits Even Parity 7N 7 Data Bits No Parity Th
119. Ti EV 70 VO Configuration a ek RR m RR Rem RR ADR RR Re Rc 70 Integer Register 71 Modbus Gateway 71 Modbus UO 73 P lse Totalizer PTOT i iud strane RET a Rz re Reine dave RT aa 74 Pump Status Control 77 Scaler Point SCALER eR HER RR a 82 Signal Selector 51 68 01 83 System Information 85 Event Timer Counter TIMER 86 Tag Register 88 Unsigned Long Integer Register 88 Valve Status Control VALVE 88 Comm Watchdog 92 7 Software BIloCKS EP mE SR eu x or 95 Varec Average Temperature Converter 4530 97 Parameters pani eee ke one Ea EROR RR pee ed 97 Application ivi e ea Glee Glee oe ade aie ble Fae WAS Roh DAR ee We 99 Saab Data Acquisition Unit 101 Parameters ii ER x eae Pea RNC Peed C Newer aon 101 AppliCation
120. U When you select Create Strap Table HEX File the Save As dialog appears Varec Inc Using ViewRTU Save As Save E vewRTU J ex Ed mems Gpves E File name Test hex Save as type HEX File hex X Cancel Figure 8 21 Save As HEX Dialog Simulator The Simulator option allows the user to write simulation scripts which will write data to the 8130 RTU database The Help Menu C ViewRTU Test rcf BAX File Point Config Communications Options Help Index About VRTU Figure 8 22 The Help Menu Contents The Contents option opens the table of contents of the ViewRTU on line help Index The Index option opens the index for the ViewRTU online system This index lists all the help screens contained in the help system About V8130 RTU The About 8130 RTU option displays a dialog box describing the copyright information and the application version number Using ViewRTU By using ViewRTU the user is able to define or modify sub programs called Software Blocks Software blocks are used to configure the 8130 RTU Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Note Refer to the 8130 RTU Software Blocks chapter for specific examples The chapter provides a description of the parameters for each point as well as examples of the connections to other points 8130 RTU software blocks are functions that the user can con
121. Undefined and the RawValue parameter will represent the hexadecimal value of the I O data Note that the status of a Digital Output DO point can be read as a Digital Input Mapping Multiple Points It is sometimes useful to map multiple DI points to a single channel For example one DI point may be used to read the status of a pump and convert the data to ON OFF using the Value O and Value 1 parameters This data would then be made available to a PUMP point A second DI point can be assigned to read the same channel and convert the data to ENABLE DISABLE by changing the Value 0 and Value 1 parameters This data can then be used as a control parameter for a totalizer allowing totalization to take place only when the pump is running Interfacing to Other Points The DI is often used as the input source a Reference for other point application programs The Digital Alarm DAL Hand Off Auto HOA Pump Control PUMP and Valve Control VALVE points use DI point data to calculate other data values or effect control The Value and the RawValue are the parameters calculated by the DI point and can be used as input in other points In some cases it might be necessary to re define the Value O Value 3 parameters as required by the other application point For example the DAL point looks for a NORMAL ALARM condition and controls a Digital Output point accordingly Diagnostic DIAG The Diagnostic point monitors built in onboard functio
122. Valve Status Control VALVE The Valve Status Control point provides interface logic for use in common valve control applications The VALVE point parameters include a maximum transition time and reserve coastdown Parameters The database parameters used by the VALVE point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Valve 1 or VCPO1 The default tag is set to VALVE 00 90 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to VALVE 00 OpenedRef The Opened Status limit switch reference Either this parameter or the ClosedRef must be defined in order for the VALVE point to operate This is normally a DI point although it can be any type of point that includes a RawValue of 0 or 1 ClosedRef The Closed Status limit switch reference Either this parameter or the OpenedRef must be defined in order for the VALVE point to operate This is usually a DI point although it can
123. a Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The DI point executes once every 250 milliseconds and converts Digital Scanner data to coded value data ON OFF etc The Digital Scanner runs every 20 msec and reads the status of the digital I O modules The Digital Scanner data is stored in an array which is then analyzed periodically by the DI point The following graph shows the relationship between the Digital Scanner and the DI point Stored Value LSI TIME ms l l 400 650 900 1150 B Digital Scanner readings Module data b Digital Input 01 point execution Scanner array Figure 6 4 Application of the DI point The Filter is applied to the Digital Scanner data array For example if the Filter is set to 3 then 3 successive readings must be the same in order for a Change of State to occur The following graph shows the use of the Filter parameter Varec Inc 63 8130 RTU Software Blocks Stored Value lf dI 400 650 900 1150 B Digital Scanner readings WO Module data DI nus bud Digital input Di point execution Scanner array Figure 6 5 DI Point Change of State diagram Reading an Entire I O Module An entire I O module can be read by a single point by setting the ChanQuan parameter to 16 In this case the Value parameter will be
124. a Bits Odd Parity 7E 7 Data Bits Even Parity 7N 7 Data Bits No Parity TI TIWAY The default is 8N TimeOut Time in seconds that indicates a time out of communications If no Host or Slave communications is received for the length of time specified by the TimeOut the CommStatus parameter will indicate Off Line and communications failure processing will take place ErrCheck Error checking used by the protocol Valid values are LRC Longitudinal Redundancy Check CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check RespDelay Time in milliseconds that 8130 RTU will delay a response to the Host The default is 50 msec SynchMax The SynchMax is used by some slave protocols for auto synchronization of the BaudRate The SynchMax is used to determine if the BaudRate is correct If the SynchMax is zero then no synchronization is attempted The default is 50 msec DirectPort The DirectPort is used then the Protocol is set to Direct Dynamic Parameters Function CommStatus Coded variable indicating the On line Offline status of the COM point State Current state of the message being sent received Command Current command being processed Status Status if the last message CommErrors The number of communication errors NumTrans The number of transactions Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The COM point controls the o
125. abase parameters used by the DAL point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to DAL 0O Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to DAL 00 PntRef Input point reference for the DAL point to monitor The DAL point interfaces to coded data values ControlRef Control reference for controlling the operation of the DAL point The ControlRef is be used to enable disable the output point link of the DAL point OutputLink Output point Link for the DAL point to control The DAL point outputs an ON or OFF value Mode The Mode parameter determines whether the Value or the RawValue is used 0 Use the Value parameter Use the RawValue and the Filter Filter If the Mode is 1 then the RawValue and Filter are used The logical AND operation of the RawValue and the Filter will cause an alarm condition Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can
126. able in this point block The MBMFT point executes on either the 8130 RTU Motherboard on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module MODx xx firmware or the Model 8217 RMDx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MBMFT point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of will use the 8130 RTU Motherboard A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the MBMFT is connected to On the Model 8203 or the Model 8217 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 2400 9600 and 19200 The BaudRate is set prior to scanning the device The default is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 80 ID Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Mode Operation Mode
127. ad All Tank Gauge Data t3 Select Download to download all of the Tank Data or Cancel to E Initiating Download TANK 00 Operation in Progress TANK 00 Request sent to RTU successfully RTU is sending request to 170 Module Please Wait Request sent to 1 0 Module successfully Downloading data to the Device Please Wait Figure 9 8 Download Tank Gauge Data Dialog Showing Finished Download Password The user can use the Password option to gain access to a protected file Once a password has been assigned the user must enter the password when attempting to edit the 8130 RTU configuration file This password is only entered once in the duration of the Tank Gauge Configurator program To enter the password 1 Select Config and click on Password 136 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Click on the edit box in the Password dialog Type in the password Click on OK CONFIGURATION PASSWORD Enter Password Figure 9 9 Configuration Password Dialog Change Password The user can use the Change Password function to protect all Tank Gauge Configuration files by issuing and changing a password To create a password 1 2 Select Config and click on Password The Change Password dialog appears In the New Password edit box enter the password If no password currently exists leave the Old Password field blank In the Retype New P
128. age Configurator Points Entering Tank Guage Configurator Point Data The principles involved in point configuration are the same but the methods are slightly different Configuring Tank Gauge Configurator Points Configuring a tank gauge configurator point involves entering configuration parameters Adding a Tank Gauge Configurator Point The user is able to add a point or point type by clicking on the Add Point button from the toolbar or by selecting Add from the Point menu Once the point is added the user is then able to configure the point Defined point types appear in the Point Icon Selection Area and in the Spreadsheet Summary of the main window In most cases there is no need to add additional points Entering Tank Gauge Configurator Point Data This section describes how to configure the parameters of any tank gauge Configurator point Each point has its own Edit Point window that requires some degree of configuration Both the configuration and dynamic attributes of the point are found in the Edit Point Window From this window the user is able to view and edit database parameters Several methods can be used to display this window depending on the user s current location in the program If in the Main window select Edit from the Point menu Select the desired point type and corresponding point number If in the main window double right click on the point icon The following example window appears 142 Instal
129. alled Some of these functions are listed below Tank Gauge Scanning Protocol Gateway Flow measurement totalization Intelligent I O to other systems Digital and Analog alarms Analog Scaling Pump and Valve control Timing Counting These functions can be implemented by configuring a Software Block using ViewRTU Varec Inc 39 8130 RTU Software Blocks Database Organization Point Format Data parameters in the 8130 RTU are addressed using a Type Number Parameter format For example Al 02 Value refers to Analog Input 2 s IEEE floating point value This format and corresponding fields are described below The TYPE field represents the Point Type There are many different point Types in the 8130 RTU referred to generically as 8130 RTU Software Blocks Some of the point types include the AI Analog Inputs DO Digital Outputs and SYS System point types Each Type performs a different function The NUMBER field represents the instance of the point type For example the AI point may have up to 32 instances which are addressed using the NUMBER field Each instance shares the same data structure definition yet each point has unique data values In the case of the AI software block each point manages a single input channel The PARAMETER field represents the items in the data structure of the point type Examples of parameters include Value Status PntRef and RawValue This field is explained in greater
130. allows the used to set the time units for the Rate For example if the desired units for the Rate is GPM gallons per minute then set the TimeUnits to Minutes The default is Seconds Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Varec Inc 77 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd ResetCmd is used to issue a reset This command set the Value to 0 Value The totalized value for the current Period If the Period is One Hour then the channel will be totalized for one hour RawValue The current scan total State The current input value of the channel PrevValue The previous period total Rate The rate of change of the pulse i
131. alues to be timed or counted This value should represent valid states of the PntRef For example if the PntRef is a pump then CompareO and Compare can be set to On and Off in order to calculate the pump runtime AlarmTimeO AlarmTimeO specifies the amount of time before CompareO is in alarm The AlarmTime is used with the TimeUnits parameters Compare Compare specifies the values to be timed or counted This value should represent valid states of the PntRef For example if the PntRef is a pump then CompareO and Compare can be set to On and Off in order to calculate the pump runtime AlarmTime1 AlarmTime specifies the amount of time before Compare is in alarm The AlarmTime is used with the TimeUnits parameters Compare2 Compare2 specifies the values to be timed or counted This value should represent valid states of the PntRef For example if the PntRef is a pump then CompareO and Compare can be set to On and Off in order to calculate the pump runtime AlarmTime2 AlarmTime2 specifies the amount of time before Compare2 is in alarm The AlarmTime is used with the TimeUnits parameters Compare3 Compare3 specifies the values to be timed or counted This value should represent valid states of the PntRef For example if the PntRef is a pump then CompareO and Compare can be set to On and Off in order to calculate the pump runtime AlarmTime3 AlarmTime3 specifies the amount of time before Co
132. ance with the National Electric Code A grounding conductor should be wired to the grounding terminal provided on the 8130 RTU In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure To assist in air circulation place blower fans inside the enclosure To prevent excessive heat several steps can be taken For most applications normal convection cooling will keep the device components in the enclosure within the operating range Proper spacing of components within the enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation Caution should be exercised when entering any area that is posted or otherwise assumed to contain hazardous gases Always follow the guidelines provided by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration for your own protection Varec Inc 13 Installation Caution Do not bring in unfiltered outside air It may introduce harmful contaminants that could damage the 8130 RTU and components Caution Never perform maintenance with power applied Installation Standard systems are shipped with the motherboard and any optional modules not installed so the 8130 RTU installation procedure includes the installation of these individual components 8130 RTU installation includes the following steps 1 Mounting the 8130 RTU Mounting the Enclosure Wiring up Power Grounding the 8130 RTU Installing Communications de Configuring
133. annel as the DO point used for the OutputLink This will allow the PUMP point to monitor the output command status 82 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit The OutputLink is usually a DO point which is connected to the pump starter Entering a Command of Start will cause the pump to start if no interlocks prevent operation A Stop command will stop the pump The PUMP point provides for several interlocks The VibrationRef may be entered which allows for shutdown of the pump if a vibration switch is activated A DI point is usually used for this purpose The VibValue needs to be Normal in order for the pump to operate Set the Value O and Value 1 parameters of the DI point to Normal and Alarm Alternatively the Value O0 and Value 1 parameters be set to Normal and High as long as one state is defined as Normal the other state can be any valid coded value The bearings or winding temperature may also be monitored The TempRef may be specified which will enable shutting down the pump if a temperature switch is activated A DI point can be used or if an analog input signal is used to measure the temperature then a AISTAT point is used The TempValue needs to be Normal in order for the pump to operate For a DI based TempRef set the Value O and Value 1 parameters to Normal and Alarm If an Al point is used to measure the temperature then use an interposing AISTAT point to set trip points for high and low o
134. anual Remote Terminal Unit Import All Select the drive and directory c fuelsmanager fmproject rtu Directory Files Cancel Figure 9 17 Convert ViewRTU Versions Dialog Note The Tank Gauge Configurator does not export strap tables to these CSV files Use the Strap Table Export feature to save strap tables in CSV file format Exit Tank Gauge Configurator The Exit Tank Gauge Configurator option allows the user to exit the Tank Gauge Configurator and return to the ViewRTU application The Help Menu C3 ViewRTU Test TCF mmx File Point Config Communications Options Help Contents Index About VRTU Figure 9 18 Help Menu Contents The Contents option allows the user to access the windows on line help file table of contents Index The Index option allows the user to search or browse through topics in the help file About 8130 RTU The About 8130 RTU option displays a dialog box describing the copyright information and the application version number Varec Inc 141 Using Tank Gauge Configurator Using Tank Gauge Configurator The Configuring Tank Gauge Configurator Point section describes the method used to configure individual points including Adding a Tank Gauge Configurator Point Entering Tank Gauge Configurator Point Data The Configuring Multiple Tank Guage Configurator Points describes the spreadsheet including Adding Multiple Tank Gu
135. aracter Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to RAPTOR OO Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to RAPTOR OO WMSeal Coded Value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Module Not used Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For an 8212 Chan is either 1 or 2 ID Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Addr FCU Address if Mode 0x02 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data read from the REX m or M levels in 1 10th millimeter s or S levels in 1 16th inch The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter Default is m LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed f feet m millimeters Default is m If no value is specified no conversion will be performed Note the LevelUnits must be set properly If the LevelUnits and the LevelConvert are the same no conversion is performed TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data read from the Raptor F Fahrenheit C Celsius The
136. arameter is derived by using the OpenedRef and ClosedRef to produce one of 4 states Opened Valve is fully opened Closed Valve is fully closed Opening Valve is in transition from Closed to Opened Closing Valve is in transition from Opened to Closed OpCondition The current operating condition Valid values are Normal Valve time out Unauthorized movement HOA is not in Auto Reversing direction Open command in progress o Close command in progress 7 Valve Stop command issued HOAValue The current Hand Off Auto status as specified by the HOARef If the HOARef is entered then the valve is only allowed to operate if the HOAValue is Auto ValvePosition Value of the parameter referenced by the PositionRef The ValvePosition can be used in conjunction with the SetPoint is order to control the valve PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The VALVE point provides status monitoring and control of commonly encountered valve applications The VALVE point provides interface logic for Hand Off Auto switches as well as reverse coastdown and transition timers A
137. arameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Dynamic Parameters Function Level IEEE Floating point value representing the tank level The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Varec Inc 101 Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function Temp Floating point value representing the product temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response from transmitter 0x0002 Data is invalid 0x0004 Command Timeout 0x8000 Gauge did not response to last request pre fail GaugeStatus Byte value indicating status of the gauge Refer to the transmitter manual for details on the GaugeStatus Reserved Reserved Reserved2 Reserved Value
138. as specified by the PressRef If the PressRef is defined then a check is made after a Start command to determine if the pressure is valid The check is made after the PressDelay has timed out The pump will continue to run only of the PressValue is Normal If the Pressure signal originates from an Analog Input or other type of point producing an analog value then use an AISTAT point to convert the signal to a Low High Normal status FlowValue The flow status as specified by the FlowRef If the FlowRef is defined then a check is made after a Start command to determine if the flow is valid The check is made after the FlowDelay has timed out The pump will continue to run only of the FlowValue is Normal If the Flow signal originates from an Analog Input or other type of point producing an analog value then use an AISTAT point to convert the signal to a Low High Normal status AlarmValue The value specified by the AlarmRef parameter The AlarmValue will cause a pump shutdown if it is not Normal If the AlarmRef is not defined then the AlarmValue is not used in the control logic FlowTotal The flow total as specified by the TotalRef If the TotalRef is specified then the value of the parameter referenced will be stored in the FlowTotal This can be used in conjunction with the FlowSetPoint in order to control the operation of the pump PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type
139. assword edit box confirm the entry by reentering the password Click on OK CHANGE PASSWORD Old Password New Password Retype New Password Figure 9 10 Change Password Dialog Note Make sure that you write down the password and store it in a secure place To change the password 1 N Select Config and click Modify Change Password The Change Password dialog appears as illustrated in creating a password In the Old Password edit box enter the current password In the New Password edit box enter the new password In the Retype New Password edit box confirm the entry by reentering the new password Click on OK Note Make sure that you write down the password and store it in a secure place Varec Inc 137 Using Tank Gauge Configurator The Communications Menu ViewRTU Test TCF Joe File Point Config Communications Options Help PC Setup Status Connect Figure 9 11 Communications Menu Setup The Setup option allows the user to define the communications channel and data rate characteristics of the communications port When selected the following dialog box appears This example dialog box contains the default settings for communications setup COMMUNICATIONS SETUP RTU Address Port COM4 Use RTS Use CTS Baud Rate 300 C1200 C2400 C 4800 r 9600 14400 gt f 38400 Data Bits Parity S
140. ating 24 VDC field voltage This supply provides field power for Digital Outputs Digital Inputs and Analog current loops It is rated at 1 2 Amps DC Input Output Power terminal block J2 The DC power terminal block is used when powering the unit from a DC source or battery backup This terminal block can also be used when external equipment must be powered from the 8130 RTU s internal power supply The triple output power supply provides 5 15 and 15 Volts These are rated 2 0 0 4 and 0 4 Amps respectively Each supply is enabled by a jumper The DC Power terminal block is shown below Varec Inc 23 Configuration OUTPUTS INPUTS 15 15 G W104 W105 W106 Figure 4 3 DC Input Voltage Terminal Block The 8130 RTU can be equipped with an optional battery backup system and a built in recharge circuit This backup system allows the 8130 RTU to continue to operate for up to 8 hours if AC input power fails G V G 24 batteries Figure 4 4 8130 RTU Battery Connection Unit AC Input Power terminal block J3 The Unit AC power terminal block is used to provide 110 220 VAC to the unit The AC Input Power terminal block is shown in the figure below 24 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Figure 4 5 AC Input Terminal Block AC Power Selection Jumpers 120 240 VAC The AC Power Selection jumpers are used to select 120 240 VAC for unit power
141. ating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Application The DAL point continually monitors the value of the PntRef reference and stores it locally in either the Value or RawValue parameters For Mode 0 it stores it in the Value parameter If the Mode 1 the PntRef data is stored in the RawValue If Mode 0 and the Value is NORMAL or OFF then the command to the OutputLink is OFF If the value of the PntRef is ALARM or ON then the command to the OutputLink is ON Any other PntRef values are ignored For Mode 1 the logical AND operation of the RawValue and the Filter will result in an alarm Interfacing to Other Points The DAL point can be used in conjunction with almost any point that produces a coded data value Typical examples are the Digital Input DI and Analog Status AISTAT points Refer to the following example The typical OutputLink is a Digital Output DO point however the DAL point is not limited to these types of points and can be used to solve a variety of problems Digital Input DI The Digital Input Point interfaces to discrete input signals such as contact closures DI and proximity switches The DI point can convert raw data into a usable format such as ON OFF OPENED CLOSED HIGH LOW or HAND OFF AUTO The DI point can also latch momentary status changes
142. ation Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd A Reset command will deactivate the output Any change in the Value will re trigger alarm processing Value Coded value representing the alarm condition Value can be either Alarm or Normal 46 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function RefValue Floating Point value of the PntRef parameter used to determine the Value parameter OutputCmd Current command sent to the OutputLink point Control This parameter is used to enable disable the ControlRef s ability to control the AAL output value State Hexadecimal value indicating which if any alarms are active 0x0001 Low Detected 0x0002 Low Holdoff Passed 0x0010 LoLo Detected 0x0020 LoLo Holdoff Passed 0x0100 High Detected 000200 High Holdoff Passed 0x1000 HiHi Detected 0x2000 HiHi Holdoff Passed
143. atus Coded value indicating the status of the current command being issued to the tank Varec Inc Dynamic Parameters Function ReplyData The reply from issuing a TestCmd ReadCmd or WriteCmd is given in the ReplyData WriteData The data to be written to the MG5000 gauge issuing a WriteCmd is given in the WriteData WriteStatus Value indicating the status of the WriteCmd being issued to the gauge Level Floating point value representing the product level measured by the MG5000 The value is in feet if the LevelConvert parameter of the associated MTSCAN point is F To convert to meters set the LevelConvert parameter of the MTSCAN point to M The default is decimal feet WaterLevel Floating point value representing the product water interface level The value is in feet if the LevelConvert parameter of the associated MTSCAN point is F To convert to meters set the LevelConvert parameter of the MTSCAN point to M The default is decimal feet Temp Floating point value representing the product average temperature calculated by the MG5000 The value is in degrees Fahrenheit if the TempConvert parameter of the associated MTSCAN point is F To convert to Celsius set the TempConvert parameter of the MTSCAN point to C RTDI Floating point value representing the temperature measured by the MG5000 from RTD1 The value is in degrees Fahrenheit if the T
144. automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Varec Inc 123 Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Dynamic Parameters Function ValueO Register values from slave device ValueO will always correspond to the first register read from the slave device using the Addr1 and Size parameters The user can read up to 64 registers from the slave device Value63 The meaning of the Value array depends upon the definition of the blocks PntStatus Byte Value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response from Device Elapse Time of the last request from the master PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MIREG point continually scans Modbus slave devices using the
145. be High Low or No No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65525 seconds The default is 60 Interval Interval for scanning of the PntRef The interval parameter is presented in HH MM SS format The default is 5 seconds Filter Input Filter Constant Specifies the number of samples to use in the Rate calculation Valid values are 1 10 The default is O Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd ResetCmd is used to issue a reset This command returns the value in Value to 0 A reset also resets the rate and High and Low values Value Calculated floating point value of the rate of change of the RefValue DailyHighVal High value for the day of parameter value defined in the PntRef TimeOfHigh Time that the DailyHighVal occurred DailyLowVal Low value for the day of parameter value defined in the PntRef TimeOfLow Time that the DailyLowVal occurred MonthlyHigh High value for the month
146. be any type of point that includes a RawValue of 0 or 1 HOARef The Hand Off Auto reference This parameter is used to enable or disable valve control as determined by the status of a Hand Off Auto switch Normally a HOA point is used for this purpose although any type of point that produces a value of Auto can be specified The valve is only allowed to operate if the value defined by the HOARef is Auto If the HOARef is not specified then the VALVE point will operate as determined by other constraints PositionRef Reference to an Al or similar point that provides a position feedback This can be used in conjunction with the SetPoint parameter to control the valve using a position setpoint The value referenced by the PositionRef is stored locally in the ValvePosition Mode Sets Operating mode of the Valve Valid values are Hold or Stop DataMode Sets the Operating Condition Offset CoastDown The reverse command coastdown This allows the user to set a timer that is used in the case of a Reverse command The value is specified in HH MM SS format The default is 10 seconds TransTimeOut The transition time maximum This causes a Stop command to be issued if the valve is in transition either Opening or Closing longer than the TransTimeOut The value is specified in HH MM SS format The default is 2 minutes OpenLink The output link for Open commands Normally a DO point is specified Clo
147. being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 300 Dynamic Parameters Function Value Coded value representing the state of the PntRef Value is a coded value RawValue Unsigned Integer value read from the PntRef OutputCmd Output command issued to the OutputLink The OutputCmd will be one of the values in the Command array The OutputCmd is a coded parameter PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Control Used to Enable or Disable the processing of the CMNDR point The ControlRef may be used to automate the Control parameter Elapse Time of execution PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The CMNDR point operates by scanning a point reference defined by the PntRef Depending upon the Mode the data is stored locally in either the Value or RawValue parameter If Mode 0 the Value parameter is used The CMNDR searches the Value array and when a match is found the corresponding Command is written to the
148. bers Spreadsheet Mode The Point Menu This menu contains the same menu options found in the main window s menu bar Refer to The Point Menu section for a description of the menu options 148 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Point Edit Options ed Add Ctl A Module Edit Ctl4E B 00 255 3 1 1 0 Select 01 255 3 1 1 0 TANK 02 255 d 1 1 0 0 255 3 1 1 0 21 Figure 9 26 Spreadsheet Mode Point Menu This option is useful for creating deleting and editing points without having to exit out of the Spreadsheet mode Spreadsheet Mode The Edit Menu SPREADSHEET MODE Point Edit Options Copy Cri4O nitNum TankNumbe TankLabel LevelHiHi l Paste Ctri4P Paste amp Dnld 1 1 Tank 1 24 5 Set Value 5 2 Tank 2 26 0 2 3 Tank3 24 0 11 4 4 Tank 4 25 75 Figure 9 27 Spreadsheet Mode The Edit Menu Copy The Copy option allows the user to copy data from a one or more selected cells To use Copy 1 Select or more cells to copy To select one or more rows click on the number s To select one or more columns click on the parameter s 2 Select the Copy option from the Edit menu The selected cells outline changes from black to red Note To undo the Copy option press the Esc key Pressing the Esc key removes the selec tion outline from the selecte
149. by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data read from the DAU F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the DAU setup The default is C Varec Inc 97 Configuration Parameters Function TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is C TempDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Temp that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 25 Tempinterleave Temperature Interleave Determines how often the temperature is read from the DAU The default is 10 which means that every tenth scan of the DAU the temperatures will be read Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report m
150. c to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point MidIntLevel Floating point value representing the water level This data is obtained with a Mid Int Level command The can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point BottomLevel Floating point value representing the tank bottom This data is obtained with a Bottom command The BottomLevel can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point UpperDensity Floating point value representing the upper interface level This data is obtained with a Upper Density command The UpperDensity can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the DensityConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point MiddleDensity Floating point value representing the upper interface level This data is obtained with a Middle Density command The MiddleDensity can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the DensityConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point BottomDensity Floating point value representing the upper interface level This data is obtained with a Bottom Density command The BottomDensity can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the DensityConvert para
151. chdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8212 has stopped updating Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The REX point provides an interface to Saab Radar Tank Gauges REX using two methods Directly to the TRL 2 bus using a Model 8212 Via an FCU using a Model 8203 MODx xx firmware Model 8212 TRL 2 Interface The Model 8212 provides the means to connect directly to the TRL 2 bus The Model 8212 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Saab REX Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface If the REX Gauges are connected to a Saab FCU then a Model 8203 is used to read data The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to a
152. cifies the engineering units for the density data DensityUnitsSpecifies the engineering units for the density data K kg m3 A API L lIbs cu ft The DensityUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup Offset Specifies the offset to the first address PntRefl 20 Input point reference for the EMU point to monitor The PntRef parameter is set to the Level parameter for the tank gauge point The temperature will be read at the same time as the level The EMU point interfaces tank gauge interface points WV1900 Whessoe Varec Model 1900 Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are Dynamic ParametersFunction PntStatusByte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration parameters Application The Emulator point EMU provides a communication interface between older tank gauging system and point blocks within the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Currently the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module can emulate a Whessoe Varec Model 6810 Tank Scanning Unit TSU The EMU point associates a tank gauge point with an address to by used by TankView EMU O provides point references for
153. col used to communicate with ViewRTU and FuelsManager In order to change the protocol set the Protocol parameter in the COM point to Modbus Master Use the Upload command in ViewRTU s Config menu to upload the MSCAN point that manages the Modbus Master protocol handler The protocol will be automatically rescheduled after a power up or a soft reset Varec Inc 107 108 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Varec Modbus Level Transmitter MBTX The Modbus Level Transmitter MBTX point provides an interface to Varec 2900 Float and Tape 2900 FTT and 4000 Advanced Technology Transmitters MSTX The 2900 FTT and Model 4000 MSTX can communicate using a number of different protocols including Mark Space and Modbus The MBTX point interfaces to 2900 FTT and Model 4000 MSTXs using Modbus For the Mark Space version of the 2900 FTT and 4000 MSTX usea MSTX point The MBTX point provides both level and temperature data Point and gauge status information is also available in this point block The MBTX point executes on either the 8130 RTU Motherboard or on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module MODx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MBTX point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monit
154. contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to AAL 00 PntRef Input point reference for the AAL point to monitor The AAL point interfaces to floating point data values ControlRef Control reference for controlling the operation of the AAL point The ControlRef is be used to enable disable the output point link of the AAL point OutputLink Output point Link for the AAL point to control The AAL point outputs an ON or OFF value LoLo Trip point associated with an alarm condition Value of LowLow Low Trip point associated with an alarm condition of Low High Trip point associated with an alarm condition of High HiHi Trip point associated with an alarm condition of HighHigh Hysteresis Is used to determine change in alarm state The RefValue must be in the normal range by an amount more than the Hysteresis for a return to normal to occur HoldOff Holdoff time used for determining an alarm condition The RefValue must be in the alarm range for a period of time greater than the HoldOff for an alarm to occur Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notific
155. cted to a lever actuated switch The switch is mounted so that the opening of the enclosure door will generate a contact closure This contact is attached to a built in Digital Channel dedicated to Intrusion Detection Caution The status of the Intrusion Alarm is available in the DIAG software block Refer to the 8130 RTU Software Blocks chapter for more information LED indicators Run Communications Online Output Enabled Error Figure 4 9 8130 RTU LED Indicators Run LED The RUN LED provides the single most important feedback of proper system operation When the system functions properly the RUN Indicator is constantly flashing If this indicator goes to a steady state condition either on or off some malfunction has occurred In addition relative processor utilization can be determined by observing the RUN Indicator duty cycle Under normal conditions the RUN Indicator flashes once every second Communications On line LED The Communications On line LED provides communication line status The On line LED will toggle each time a valid message is received Varec Inc 27 Configuration Output Enable LED The Output Enable LED indicates the 8130 RTU Motherboard is communicating with the 1 modules Error LED The Error LED indicates that either a CPU or memory fault has occurred Voltage LED The 24V 5V 15V 15V Led indicate that the corresponding voltage signals are present Communicatio
156. d by the RTG point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to 00 WMSeal Coded value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8212 or Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the RTG is connected to On the Model 8212 or Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 ID Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Addr FCU Address if Mode 0x02 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data F feet m Millimeters s sixteenths of inches The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F feet m Millimeters M Meters
157. d by the Size parameter Varec Inc 71 8130 RTU Software Blocks Size Parameter A range of addresses can be specified by setting the Size parameter This sets the indexing mode to Number Indexing which means that Block Read Write requests from the Hosts are handled by stepping through the points number by number For example if Addr1 is 100 and PntRefl is DI 00 RawValue then a Block Read to address 100 with a length of 8 will return the values DI 00 RawValue DI 01 RawValue DI 07 RawValue Configuration IO The I O Configuration point provides information about the I O configuration of the modules Parameters 8130 RTU The IO point also allows the user to issue reset commands to certain The database parameters used by the IO point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function ChanMode The ChanMode parameter determines whether Al DI AO and DO points are addressed starting at O or 1 The default is 1 i e all physical channels are addressed starting with 1 1 IOPort4 1 O Module connected to the I O expansion ports P1 P4 At initialization the 8130 RTU will interrogate each port to determine which 1 O Modules are present If 0 then no device was found Valid values include the following 8201 16 Channel Digital In Out 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface 8204 8 Channel Multi Function 8205 16 Channel Analog Input 8207
158. d cells Paste The Paste option allows the user to paste the copied group of cells red outline to the currently selected group of cells black outline To use Paste 1 Select the cells on which the copied cells will be pasted Varec Inc 149 Using Tank Gauge Configurator 2 Select the Paste option from the Edit menu Note Ifthe number of rows and columns in both selections do not match the extra copied cells are truncated Incompatible cells containing different data types are not copied instead a warning is displayed SPREADSHEET MODE t3 Point Edit Options Is n 31 4 Figure 9 28 Spreadsheet Mode Copying and Pasting Point Parameter Data Rows 1 was Copied onto Rows 2 Paste amp Dnld The Paste amp Download option is very similar to the Paste menu selection Set Value The Set Value option allows the user to enter or select a value for a parameter To use Set Value 1 Click on the desired cell or column 2 Select Set Value from the Edit menu The Modify Value dialog box appears MODIFY VALUE Module 1 0 Module 255 Store Figure 9 29 Spreadsheet Mode Editing Point Parameter Values 3 Enter or select a value from the scroll list Set Value with Auto Increment This option can also be used for numeric parameters such as channels to auto increment the value Follow the procedure below To use Set Value
159. dCurrent Floating point value of the built in current monitor presented in mA InputPower Indicates whether the 8130 RTU is operating from AC or DC power Intrusion Coded data value of the state of the built in intrusion alarm either Normal or Alarm Elapse Time of the last Change of State Application The Diagnostic point periodically scans the 8 bit A D converter on the 8130 RTU motherboard and converts the data into floating point values It also scans the state of the Intrusion Alarm The values calculated include the Unit Temperature and both the Unit and Field Currents of the 24VDC supply The range on the Unit Temperature is 13 F to 212 F The range on the Unit and Field Currents is O to 1100 mA The Unit Current will include the values of the Field Current and the current required to operate the motherboard and 1 0 module circuitry The DIAG point also allows the user to specify up to 8 parameters that will be displayed on the Front Panel Display when one of the COM ports is configured in the Local Diag mode Typically COM O is used for this purpose Refer to Chapter 8 Local Diagnostics Interface for more information on this mode of operation Digital Output DO The Digital Output Point interfaces to digital output signals such as pumps valves FJ annunciators or any other type of actuators The DO point is used to provide access DO to the output registers of a Model 8201 16 Channel Digital I O Mo
160. ddress 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Saab REX Varec Inc 141 An REX point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU The ID must match the unit address of the Saab REX Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the Radar Tank Gauge The communications parameters are set as each REX point is processed The REX point works in conjunction with the Modbus Master protocol handler MSCAN points are automatically created and the user only has to set the Module Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID parameters in order to establish communications with the Saab REX The Mode parameter determines whether the REX point reads the data from the Saab FCU s holding registers If the Mode is 0x02 then the data is read from the holding registers The Addr parameter determines the FCU address and the ID is not used If the Mode is then the FCU sends the request to the REX and sends the response back to the 8130 RTU The ID is used and the Addr parameter is ignored This mode is sometimes referred to as pass through mode Weights amp Measures Protection The REX point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameters can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters when unlocked and will be greyed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal t
161. des status information In ViewRTU the Al DI and PTOT points are represented by the following symbols ES yp RI PTOT Figure 6 1 Al DI and PTOT Symbols The data in the scan tables is not directly accessible to the user Refer to the Analog Alarm Point AAL and Digital Alarm Point DAL sections for more information on how to use scanner data Varec Inc 43 8130 RTU Software Blocks Output Registers Output Registers are used to control operation of Analog and Digital outputs The Digital Output DO is used to effect a state change on an output channel In ViewRTU the DO point is represented by the symbol Figure 6 2 DO Symbol Modbus Communications The 8130 RTU is capable of communicating with Modbus compatible devices It is possible to communicate with both Modbus Masters and Slave devices The 8130 RTU is flexible allowing communications with devices that strictly comply with the Modicon Modbus protocol as well as devices with more advanced Modbus implementations such as Honeywell s APM SIO There are two protocol handlers available with the 8130 RTU The Modbus Master protocol handler performs scanning of Modbus slave devices The Modbus Master may reside on the 8130 RTU Motherboard COM 0 COM 1 or COM 2 or it may run on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module The Modbus Slave protocol handler responds to read and write requests from a Modbus master system It is available only on the 813
162. dler responds to requests from Modbus masters A MODGW point is automatically created to provide user access to the operation of the protocol handler The MODGW point also provides dynamic information about the communications requests from the Modbus master 44 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit The Modbus Slave protocol handler is flexible allowing the user to set options for handling several aspects of Modbus communications The Modbus Slave uses the GWBLK Gateway Block as a lookup table for data addresses The Gateway Block allows the user to specify data address and point reference combinations This allows the 8130 RTU to be used with an existing system that is already configured The user defines a GWBLK point and specifies which parameter in the 8130 RTU will be used for a particular address When a request from a master is received the Modbus Slave protocol handler will first search for any GWBLK points and determine if the data address of the request is specified in one of the GWBLK points If the data address is contained in a GWBLK point then the corresponding point reference is used to provide the data for the reply to the master Inherent 8130 RTU Software Blocks The following sections describe in detail each of the listed points that are embedded in every 8130 RTU Each section provides instructions on configuring the software block and the applications of the software block Analog Alarm AAL
163. duct in flammable or hazardous liquid storage areas take necessary measures to protect it from impact Warning Sparks or static charge could cause fire or explosion Mechanical connections worker activity and worker clothing may accumulate electrostatic charges Care should be used in flammable environments to avoid the hazard Varec Inc Remote Terminal Unit Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit T OVOFVIBW a soc mo o tas NC te esu ta Nd 1 Eeat less LI dE LED ur 1 General I 1 Applications i au ek ela RERO RORCR 1 221 xeu HARE RW ER 1 Memory 1 DC Power 2 AC Power 2 Physicals PIRA 2 Environmental 0 0 0 eee 2 Digital Inputs eect wee eR EE rer MR oe ae eS ele a Pee UR 2 Analog INPUTS ies ai Yaa Pl Wg ky UR PP ee 3 Analog Outputs stoc teow daw deta awk ae twa hd ek 3 Intelligent Communications 3 Gas Tube 3 Field 4
164. dule or a Model 8204 Multi Function Module Varec Inc 65 8130 RTU Software Blocks Parameters The database parameters used by the DO point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to DO 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to DO 00 Channel Physical Channel 1 32 For multi channel devices this is the first channel of the channel sequence The default is to match the Point Name i e DO 00 Channel 1 ChanQuan Total number of physical channels assigned to the point 0 8 Value O Value 0 corresponds to the command to de activate an output The user may choose from any predefined coded value The default is Off Value 1 Value 1 corresponds to the command to activate an output The user may choose from any predefined coded value The default is On ContactType Determines how the output valve should be set opened or closed The default value is NO Normally Open Pulse
165. e Hide Row Col The Hide Row Col option allows the user to hide selected rows or columns Varec Inc 151 Using Tank Gauge Configurator Note The Copy and Paste operations do not affect hidden rows and columns 1 Select more rows or columns 2 Select the Hide Row Col option from the Options menu The selected rows or columns are indicated by a in the row or column buttons heading The following dialog box illustrates this feature SPREADSHEET MODE l Point Edit Options UnitNum TankNumbe TankLabel LevelHiHi Tank 1 24 5 0 2 2 Tank 2 25 0 0 4 4 Tank 4 25 75 Device Figure 9 32 Spreadsheet Mode Hiding Columns The user can unhide a row or column by clicking on the associated To unhide all the rows columns the user can select the Unhide All option from the Options menu Unhide All The Unhide All option allows the user to reveal all of the rows or columns that are currently hidden 152 Installation and Operations Manual 10 Local Diagnostic Interface The LDI is typically a small menu driven terminal with an alphanumeric keypad you can use to alter database points in the 8130 RTU from a field location You can also use a hand held terminal or notebook PC with the LDI Just connect the device to the correct 8130 RTU COM port to gain access to the 101 With the LDI you can change the 8130 RTU in the following ways Add Points Add po
166. e DO and AO points then determine individually what their response to the offline condition will be The DO and AO points can either ignore the notification and do nothing or set their output to the value specified in the Comm FailValue 94 Installation and Operations Manual 7 Software Blocks This chapter describes the Software Blocks that are included in the 8130 Remote Terminal Unit RTU The Software Blocks are listed in alphabetical order by acronym Varec Inc 95 Software Blocks 96 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Varec Average Temperature Converter AT4530 transmitter This point provides average temperature and individual temperature ni The AT4530 point provides an interface to the Varec AT4530 temperature element data Other information such as point and transmitter status is also available in this software block The AT4530 point can execute on a Model 8203 Modbus MODx xx firmware a Model 8211 WB3 20 firmware a Model 8213 VI x xx firmware or a Model 8217 Modbus RMDx xx firmware The AT4530 point does not communicate directly to Prothermo device All communication must be made via a SG6000x ProServo or a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 Parameters The database parameters used by the AT4530 point are listed and described below Config Parameters Function WMSeal Coded Value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Tag
167. e Export button lets the user export the strap table from the Edit Strap Table dialog to a file Check The Check button lets the user confirm that the strap table has a valid data format If the strap table is in the correct format it displays the following check dialog If a problem exists in the strap table format it displays the following check dialog and takes you to the entry that has the problem To import a strap table 1 Click Import The Open dialog appears Open Look in E ViewRTU Files of type Strap Table Files tst d Figure 9 23 Open Dialog 2 Select or enter the file name and click OK The system returns you to the Edit Strap Table dialog displaying the imported information 146 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit To export the strap table 1 Click Export The Save As dialog appears Open Look in ViewRTU z e E Bms ows F Jo11 tst Files of type Strap Table Files tst v Cancel A Figure 9 24 Save As Dialog 2 Enter a file name and click OK The file name must have a TST or CSV extension so you can import the file at another time The system saves the file and returns you to the Edit Strap Table dialog Configuring Multiple Tank Gauge Configurator Points The spreadsheet mode is one of the methods used to configure points This method is the most be
168. e MBMFT Status Integer Register 80 Values are 0x0001 Offline Mode 0x0002 Constant Data Modified 0x0004 Not Calculating Density 0x0008 Level out of Strap Table Range 0x0010 RTD not immersed 0x0020 Not Calculating 0x0040 Constant data incomplete or incorrect 0x0080 Calculation Error 0x0100 API Correction Error 0x0200 Reserved 0x0400 CPU Board Failure 0x0800 Reserved 0x1000 Water Level Sensor Failure 0x2000 Communications Board Failure 0x4000 Level Mismatch 0x8000 HART Encoder Battery Low PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0001 Gauge Not Responding 0x0010 Failure of the Model 8203 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8203 has stopped updating 0x4000 Aux Switch status 0x8000 High Level Switch status Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MBMFT point provides an interface to Varec Model 4200 Multi Function Transmitters that operate in Modbus mode Model 4200 MBMFTs are connected directly to a Model 8203 Dual RS 106 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit 485 Interface Module The Model 8203 or the Model 8217 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Model 8203 Module and Channel are us
169. e PTOT is often used as the input source a Reference for other point application programs The Analog Alarm AAL Analog Status AISTAT and Min Max Average SIGSEL points are examples of points that use PTOT point data to calculate other data values or effect control Pump Status Control PUMP The Pump Status Control point provides interface logic for use in common pump control applications A number of operating conditions are considered including vibration flow rate suction discharge pressure and bearings winding temperature 78 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Parameters The database parameters used by the PUMP point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Pump Control 1 or The default tag is set to PUMP 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to PUMP 00 ValueRef The pump status reference This parameter must be defined in order for the PUMP point to operate This is normally a DI point although it can be any type of point t
170. e Spreadsheet Summary lists all the tank gauge configuration point types and corresponding number defined in the file You can use this summary as a quick method for creating and editing the contents of each point by double clicking on the desired point type The parameters listed in the Spreadsheet summary directly correlate with each defined point Point Icon Selection Area All the tank gauge configuration point icons are displayed in the Point Icon Selection Area Point icons are visual representations of the tank gauge configuration point settings 132 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit The Tank Gauge Configurator Menu Bar This section describes all the menus found in the Tank Gauge Configurator menu bar The button icons found in the Toolbar are shown next to each associated menu option This section primarily describes the functionality of each menu option The File Menu The File menu allows the user to create open and save configuration files This menu also allows the user to save the current configuration to a different file name CI ViewRTU Test TCF max File Point Config Communications Options Help New Ctl n Open Ctrl 0 Save 5 Save As Exit Figure 9 2 File Menu New The user is able to create a new configuration file by clicking on the New button from the toolbar or by selecting New from the File menu When selected a dialog box appears
171. e default is 7E or 7 data bits even parity LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F feet M Millimeters If no value is specified no conversion will be performed TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed DensityConvert Determines the units in which the density data will be displayed A API L Ibs cu ft kgs m3 If no value is specified no conversion will be performed Dynamic Parameters Function Message Hex representation of the request sent by the host Command Current Command Addr Displays the tank number of the currently selected tank LevelRef The reference point for level and temperature data for the tank currently requested by TankView Flags Hex value representing the operational status NumRequests Number of requests from TankView or Entis NumComErrors Number of errors Elaspe Time of last request PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The EMUGW point is automatically created when the TankView TSU Slave protocol is initiated In order to use the TSU Slave protocol set the Protocol parameter of the COM point to TSU Slave At that time an EMUGW and an EMU point will be created to provide a user interface for Varec Inc 69
172. e surge protection for 1 0 and communications by using combination of Gas Discharge Tubes and Transzorbs To eliminate surge transients gas discharge tubes augment the standard on board surge protection by providing a conductive ground Gas tube protection is the standard for Analog Inputs RS 485 Communications Tank Gauge Interfaces and Input power Surge Protection including Gas Discharge Tubes is provided on the following interfaces AC Input DC Power Input RS 485 Communications Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Model 8205 16 Channel Analog Input Model 8207 8 Channel Analog Output Model 8208 TIWAY Interface Model 8210 Varec Mark Space Interface Model 8211 Current Loop Interface Model 8212 Saab Interface Model 8213 VI Interface Varec Model 8214 Enraf Interface Model 8215 L amp J Tankway Interface Model 8216 LON Interface Barton Instruments Other features of gas tube protection are listed below Gas Discharge Tube Surge Breakdown 1200 Volts max Gas Discharge Tube DC Breakdown 500 Volts max Maximum Surge Current 10 x 1000 usec 300 Amps peak Maximum Surge Current 10 x 50 usec 1500 Amps peak Impulse Life 300A 10 x 1000 usec 80 to 400 Surges Field Maintenance Field maintenance of the 8130 RTU is simplified by several built in features The modular design of the computer control system in conjunction with quick disconnect connectors allows for on site replacement of questionable components
173. e temperature data read from the MBTX F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The default is F TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is F TempDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Temp that must occur for the temperature to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 25 LevelOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Level The default is O TempOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Temp The default is O LevelDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Level that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is O TempDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Temp that must occur for the temperature to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 25 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parame
174. e that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Module The Module parameter determines where the SG6000 point will execute The SG6000 point can be used with either a Model 8203 or a Model 8213 Valid values are 1 4 A value of 255 disables scanning Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For a Model 8213 Chan is 1 through 4 For a Model 8203 Chan is either 1 or 2 The Device ID of the SG6000 Servo Mode Parameter used to control the operation of the SG6000 point It has different meanings depending on whether the Model 8203 or the Model 8213 is used 8203 Dual RS 485 Modbus Communications Interface Module 0x0002 SG6000 Odd Parity 0x0400 SG6000 Even Parity 0x0100 SG6000 Read Density from Average Profile Density 0x1000 SG6000 Density Profile flag clear for Modbus 8213 Dual RS 485 Modbus Communications Interface Module 0x8000 MDP Protocol 0x4000 DX Protocol 0x0002 Ignore S Command 0x0001 Ignore R Command LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data F feet m Millimeters M Meters I Inches The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter in the appropriate VISCAN or MSCAN point Varec Inc 103 Config Constant Parameters Function TempuUnits Specifies the engineering
175. e the addresses Set the Addr1 and Sizel parameters to read a data block from the slave device The response will be placed in the ValueO Value63 parameters For example if Addr1 100 and Sizel 10 then the MFPREG point will read 10 register values and place the data in ValueO Value9 If a second block is defined then the data response will start in Value10 If the Size is 0 then that block is disabled The Mode parameter can be used to swap the byte order of the floating point values Installation and Operations Manual MTG Tank Gauge Interface MG5000 The MG5000 Tank Gauge MG5000 point provides an interface to MTS Magnetostrictive Tank Gauges and MTS Systems Corporation Level Plus Direct Digital Access Gauges The MG5000 Tank Gauges consist of magnetostrictive level and RTD temperature sensors providing highly accurate digital output data This data is transmitted over an EIA 485 communication data bus which allows multi drop connection eliminating the requirement for individual cable runs to each gauge The MG5000 point provides product level product water interface level and temperature data as well as gauge status information Configuration and diagnostic information is also available from the MG5000 and can be modified if necessary The MG5000 point can execute on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module The Model 8203 provides 2 EIA 485 data busses which can interface to a maximum of 16 MG5000 gauges per bus
176. e the drag and drop features of Windows The user is able to connect the output data of one point to the input of another point The connections are made through point references and links Not all points have references but any parameter of a point can be referenced Some references are incompatible with some types of data The program can determine if a reference is valid but it cannot determine if the reference is meaningful The Input Data parameters which are located on the left side of the software block are references The Output Data parameters which are located on the right side are most commonly referenced by other points To create a Connection 1 Select the desired point icon from the Icon Bar and drag it onto the desired data parameter If the point dropped does not exist then the user needs to define the point as described in the previous section The same configuration process is used to define the point If multiple points exist the user is prompted to select the point number If the point dropped already contains a reference to another input reference a dialog box appears inquiring whether or not to overwrite the existing reference 2 The point icon appears to the right or left of the selected arrow Note Double left clicking a focus point icon allows the user to view the point s Edit Point window Note Double left clicking the input source or the output destination icon allows the user to step through each co
177. e with the Saab Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface If the Radar Tank Gauges are connected to a Saab FCU then a Model 8203 is used to read data The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Saab RTG An RTG point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU The ID must match the unit address of the Saab RTG Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the Radar Tank Gauge The communications parameters are set as each RTG point is processed The RTG point works in conjunction with the Modbus Master protocol handler MSCAN points are automatically created and the user only has to set the Module Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID parameters in order to establish communications with the Saab RTG The Mode parameter determines whether the RTG point reads the data from the Saab FCU s holding registers If the Mode is 0x02 then the data is read from the holding registers The Addr parameter determines the FCU address and the ID is not used If the Mode is 0 then the FCU sends the request to
178. eading from causing a Change Of State The default is 2 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 62 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function Value Coded string representing the current converted RawValue of the channel s assigned to the point Other points use Value as input for higher level processing RawValue Binary number representing the current value of the channel s assigned to the point The Raw Value is calculated using the Filter parameter Some points use the RawValue instead of the Value parameter PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 3 Configuration change 4 Configuration checksum error 6 Value changed but did not pass Filter criteri
179. ed for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 2 etc If the Module parameter is set to O the MBMFT point will use one of the communications channels on the 8130 RTU Motherboard The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Model 4200 MBMFT An MBMFT point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU The ID must match the unit address of the Model 4200 MBMFT Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the slave device The communications parameters are set as each MBMFT point is processed This allows slaves with different baud rates and data link settings to exist on the same bus this practice is allowed but not recommended The MBMFT point works in conjunction with the Modbus Master protocol handler If a Model 8203 or Model 8217 Dual RS 485 Interface Module fitted with the Modbus Master firmware MSCAN points are automatically created and the user only has to set the Module Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID parameters in order to establish communications with the Model 4200 MBMFT If one of the two RS 485 communications on the 8130 RTU Motherboard is used then the Modbus Master protocol handler for that channel must be started The default protocol for COM O 1 and 2 after a hard reset is 8130 RTU Slave which is the proto
180. ed to check for a match The CMNDR starts comparing values from Value 0 and if a match is found the value the associated Command parameter is written to the OutputLink Only the first match is executed Command 0 7 Command values for the Value 0 7 parameters in Coded format Output 0 7 Output values in Hexadecimal format Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Mode Determines whether the Value or the RawValue is used If Mode 0 the Value parameter is used and must match one of the ValueO 7 values If a match is found then the associated Command is written to the OutputLink If Mode 1 then the RawValue is used with the Filter The Filter is ANDed with the RawValue and if the result is TRUE the Command is executed For both Mode 0 and Mode 1 only the first match is executed Filter Used for Mode 1 The Filter is used in conjunction with the RawValue The CMNDR point starts with Bit O and checks to see if bits are set in both the Filter and the RawValue Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses
181. een saved the user is prompted to save the file or cancel the option The Point Menu C3 ViewRTU Test rcf File Point Config Communications Options Help Add Ct4A Edit Ctri4E Delete Ctrl Y Figure 8 4 The Point Menu Add The user is able to add a point to the current configuration The user is able to add a point by clicking the Add Point icon from the tool bar or by selecting Add from the Point menu The Select Point to Add dialog box appears SELECT POINT TO ADD Point Type UNIT E Point Num 0 ETT Quantity 1 UNIT Cancel Figure 8 5 Dialog Viewed when Adding a New Point Select Point to Add Dialog Box This dialog box displays a list of available point types the point number quantity and the corresponding point icon The point icon is then added to the Point Icon Selection Area if it does not already exist The Point Type lists the currently selected point The user can select the desired point by selecting the point from the scroll list The Point Number defaults to 0 if the point type has just been defined The maximum number of points entered depends on the selected point type Once entered the point quantity is displayed in the Summary Spreadsheet Multiple points of the selected type may be created simultaneously by entering the number in the Quantity edit box Edit This option is used to modify the contents of a selected point The user is able to edit
182. el 8211 WBx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the TM4590 point are listed and described below Config Constant Parameters Function WMSeal Coded parameter value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Tank 22 The default tag is set to TM4590 00 Module The Module parameter determines where the TM4590 point will execute The TM4590 point can be used with a Model 8203 a Model 8213 ora Model 8211 Valid values are 1 4 A value of 255 disables scanning Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For a Model 8213 Chan is 1 through 4 For a Model 8203 or 8211 Chan is either 1 or 2 ID The Device ID of the TM4590 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Model 8203 Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 The default is 9600 Model 8211 Valid values are 1200 2400 Model 8213 Sets the V1 protocol pulse width If the BaudRate is set to 00 then the pulse width is approx 303 uS 1 3300 BPS Any value larger than 99 will be interpreted as 99 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits
183. el on the 8213 Servo TM4590 Prothermo is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the Servo or TM4590 Modbus Protocol Using Modbus Protocol Prothermo temperature transmitters are connected to a SG6000 Servo tank gauge or a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 The Servo or TM4590 is connected to a Model 8203 Modbus Interface Module The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and a MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8203 will be used and to which channel on the 8203 Servo TM4590 Prothermo is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the Servo or TM4590 General All three interface methods provide a software interface to the Varec AT4530 Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The TempUnits must match the engineering units of the AT4530 temperature transmitter Conversion from Metric to English or vice versa can be performed by setting the TempConvert parameters in the VI SCAN or RKSCN point associated with the AT4530 point Varec Inc 97 98 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Saab Data Acquisition Unit DAU The Saab Data Acquisition Unit point provides an interface to Saab Model 2100 Data DAU Acquisition Units The DAU point interfaces to Saab DAUs using Modbus through a Saab FCU The 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module is used to connect to the FCU The 8212 Saab T
184. empConvert parameter of the associated MTSCAN point is F To convert to Celsius set the TempConvert parameter of the MTSCAN point to C RTD2 Floating point value representing the temperature measured by the MG5000 from RTD2 RTD3 Floating point value representing the temperature measured by the MG5000 from RTD3 RTD4 Floating point value representing the temperature measured by the MG5000 from RTD4 RTD5 Floating point value representing the temperature measured by the MG5000 from RTD5 PntStatus Integer HEX value indicating status of point Values are 0 No Error 0x0001 Gauge not responding 0x0002 Data from gauge is invalid CRC or Parity error 0x0004 Invalid command 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8203 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8203 has stopped updating ErrorCode Displays MG5000 Error Codes The format is E followed by the code number Exxx Elapse Time of last scan PntCheckSum Database Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MG5000 point continually scans data from an associated MTS Systems Corporation MG5000 Gauge Each MG5000 point corresponds to a gauge connected to the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface Module programmed with the MTSx xx series firmware or the MODX XX series firmware in the case of the Modbus gauge 120 Installation and Operations Manual
185. es Tank Types Tank1Enable Tank 1 Enabled Tank 2 Enabled Tank 3 Enabled Tank 4 Enabled Level Units Volume Units Temperature Units saz e e Density Units Mass Units cococoocooooco RTU Comm Channel 170 Module Channel Device ID Config Command Next Download Examine Previous Upload Exit Figure 9 5 Edit Point Dialog Edit Point Dialog This dialog box contains all dynamic and configurable field information The user is able to edit point data Exiting this dialog box returns the user to the main window Note Several other methods can be used to display the Edit Point dialog box These meth ods and other information are explained in greater detail in the Application section The Config Menu C3 ViewRTU Test TCF File Point Config Communications Options Help Download All Password Change Password Figure 9 6 Configuration Menu Download All The Download option is used to download all the configuration data to the tank gauge The following dialog box is displayed Varec Inc 135 Using Tank Gauge Configurator Download All Tank Gauge bata t3 Select Download to download all of the Tank Gauge Data or Cancel to E Figure 9 7 Dialog used to Download 8130 RTU Data To download all the data to the tank gauge the user selects the Download button The system transmits all the tank gauge configuration data to the tank gauge Downlo
186. eters in order to establish communications with the Model 4000 MSTX If one of the two RS 485 communications on the 8130 RTU Motherboard is used then the Modbus Master protocol handler for that channel must be started The default protocol for COM 1 and 2 after a hard reset is 8130 RTU Slave which is the protocol used to communicate with ViewRTU and FuelsManager In order to change the protocol set the Protocol parameter in the COM point to Modbus Master Use the Upload command in ViewRTU s Config menu to upload the MSCAN point that manages the Modbus Master protocol handler The protocol will be automatically rescheduled after a power up or a soft reset The MBTX point scans the following Modbus data from the Model 4000 MSTX Command Address Data of Registers 65 0 Level Temp 2 Floating point 4 5 AlmStat DiagStat 2 Integers 65 21 Level Reference 1 Floating point It is possible to calibrate the MSTX from the MBTX point Set the LevelRef to the desired level in the tank Issue a Calibrate command set the Command parameter to Calibrate The Level will be offset by the LevelRef Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Modbus Floating Point Register MFPREG The Modbus Integer Register point is used to scan Modbus compatible slave devices Moo real The user can scan up to four blocks of data allowing access to a total of 64 register values When the Protocol paramete
187. fied to be used in Division Il Class 1 Group A D hazardous locations The user should follow safety guidelines provided by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA for additional protection Information may be obtained from the following sources National Electric Code NEC National Fire Protection Association NFPA Instrument Society of America ISA Factory Mutual Research Corporation FM Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated UL Canadian Standards Association CSA When in doubt about the safety of an area the user should check with the local safety authorities Always observe warning signs posted in the area and all labels on equipment Installation Safety Guidelines Never attempt to make voltage measurements within the 8130 RTU in the field Maintenance should be performed only by authorized personnel Always turn off the power before removing the case cover Before installing repairing any wiring to the 8130 RTU make sure that the power is turned off at the main circuit breaker or switch The power switch should be locked in the OFF position and labeled to prevent other personnel from turning the power on during installation Before turning on power when installation is complete make sure the cover of the 8130 RTU case is in place and tightly closed NEVER REMOVE ANY COVERS WITHOUT FIRST TURNING OFF THE POWER To prevent shock hazards the housing of all units should be properly grounded in accord
188. figuration instructions for each I O expansion board can be found in the following relevant chapters Motherboard Description The motherboard description is broken into three sections Each section identifies the location of the components on the motherboard When necessary a brief description of the component is provided These sections are listed below Power Supply Switches and Indicators Communications Varec Inc 21 Configuration losoloio T mdr E o Oo i oQ9 3d aH 9 ud n SS D 10 58 ns Assembly 012259 0 20 Channels 17 32 s08 Rev 00795 g qm I O Expansion We Connectors eS 9 n 9 P3 amp P4 O Channels 1 16 o I O Expansion Connectors g P1 amp P2 3 O 0000 0005 eae of Lej Figure 4 1 8130 RTU Motherboard 22 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit DC Input Output Power terminal block J2 Field voltage adjustment pot R101
189. figure to perform various tasks Software Blocks are available to scan data from a slave device control a pump serve data to other Host systems or perform calculations Each function type contains both the code and data necessary to perform the function Software Blocks are identified by their type example Al DI LJ2000 and PUMP Points are individual instances of software blocks Each point must be added and then configured Adding a point makes the point available for configuration defined points appear in both the Point Icon Selection area and the Spreadsheet Summary in the main window Configuring the point involves entering configuration parameters In some cases connections to other points are required in order to perform a task Creating connections involves setting references to allow data to be transferred between points Overview An outline of the section is listed below Configuring Single Points This section describes the method used to configure individual points including Adding a Point This section describes how to define a point from the Main window Entering Point Data This section describes how to enter the point s parameters Parameters are entered from the Edit Point Window Modifying Strap Tables This section describes how to modify strap tables in ViewRTU Configuring Multiple Points This section describes the spreadsheet mode The principles involved in point configuration are the same but the
190. for each point or group of points The user can also export import files and control the selection of displayed parameters Compare this window to the Edit Point window see Figure 6 7 on page 6 8 The two windows contain the same parameters In the spreadsheet mode the user is able to view and modify all the points of the selected type In the Edit Point window the user steps through a window for each point number using the Next and Previous icons The left two columns D and U are used to download and upload respectively the information found in the corresponding row s The third column lists the point numbers The Spreadsheet Mode menu bar contains menus used to perform various functions to one or more points Each of the Spreadsheet Mode menus is described below The Point Menu This menu contains the same menu options found in the main window s menu bar Refer to The Point Menu section for a description of the menu options Varec Inc 123 Using ViewRTU 8g Point Exit Options Ctrl a y Mode LevelRef TempRef WaterRet 1 Edit Ctrl4E Delete CtrlaY bo 0 NMS53 00 Level Al 00 Value Al 01 Value 01 0 NMS53 01 Level Al 02 Value Al 09 Value TANK 02 0 NMS53 02 Level AI 03 Value Al 10 Value TANK 03 0 NMS53 03 Level Al 04 Value Al 11 Value TANK 04 0 NMS53 04 Level Al 05 Value Al 12 Value TANK 05 0 NMS53 05 Level Al 06 Value Al 13 Value 06 0 NMS53 06 Level
191. g connector The 8130 RTU enclosure is supplied with a ground bar at the base of the unit A 14 AWG copper wire should be connected between this ground bar and a good earth ground before connecting any other wires The resistance from the 8130 RTU ground to the grounding electrode must not exceed 1 ohm Additional ground wires should be connected as required for each 1 0 module Caution All applicable codes and ordinances must be observed when wiring the 8130 RTU 16 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Installing Communications RS 232 Communications To install the RS 232 communication option connect an RS 232 cable to connector J5 COMO J6 COMI or J7 COM2 Note When using COMI and COM2 jumper blocks W6 and W7 must be set for RS 232 mode See the Model 8217 Dual RS 232 Interface manual for more details RS 485 Communications To install the RS 485 communications option connect a single twisted wire pair to J8 COMI or J10 COM2 Note When using COMI and COM2 jumper blocks W6 and W7 must be set for RS 485 mode For more information see the Communications section on page 28 Surge Ground 18 22 AWG Twisted pair with shield PC or Host PC or Host mmm Figure 3 4 RS 485 Communications Connections Power Up Before the field cables are attached perform an initial system verification Initial system verification Connect the power cable to power connector P
192. haking RTS CTS is required The other setting eliminates the need for hardware handshaking Use RTS CTS when a modem or signal converter is involved and requires RTS CTS to operate If the connection is direct using RS 232 jumper RTS to CTS Refer to the following jumper block diagrams These jumper settings are used for both COMI and COM2 999 O vo 9969 O no 99 9 no ats e O ars 1 e O Ics 99 cts RS 232 RS 232 RS 485 RTS jumpered to CTS with RTS CTS handshaking Figure 4 11 Jumper Block Configurations for COMI and COM2 Varec Inc 29 Configuration COMO J5 COMO is an RS 232 port for use in diagnostic testing or local programming The protocol defaults to 8130 RTU Slave at the 9600 baud 8 data bits and no parity COMO is typically connected to a PC running ViewRTU COM amp 2 RS 232 J6 J7 RS 232 is one of the two types of high speed serial communications channels available to interface to Host or Slave systems using a variety of industry standard protocols Both COMI and COM2 may be used simultaneously for increased throughput and redundancy RS 232 can be used for flexibility in configuring other types of communications links Other variations of RS 232 communications interfaces include radio modem and fiber optic interfaces The channels may also connect to different hosts using a variety of protocols For I
193. hat produces an On or Off value StartLink The output Link for Start command Normally a DO point is specified StopLink The output Link for Stop command Normally a DO point is specified HOARef The Hand Off Auto reference This parameter is used to enable or disable pump control as determined by the status of a Hand Off Auto switch Normally a HOA point is used for this purpose although any type of point that produces a value of Auto can be specified The pump is only allowed to run if the value defined by the HOARef the HOAValue is Auto If the pump is running and the HOAValue changes from Auto to anything else the pump will be shut down If the HOARef is not specified then the PUMP point will operate as determined by other constraints Note that defining the HOARef means that all constraints VibrationRef TempRef PressRef FlowRef AlarmRef TotalRef are active only if the HOAValue is Auto VibrationRef The Vibration status reference This parameter is used for shutdown lockout logic Normally a DI point is used for this although any type of point that produces a value of Normal can be specified The value referenced by the VibrationRef is stored locally in the VibValue parameter If the value of the VibrationRef is Normal then the pump will be allowed to run If the value of the VibrationRef is anything other than Normal such as High or Alarm the Command will be Stop and the pump will be shut down If the
194. he database parameters used by the DREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value Double Word 4 bytes value Emulator EMU The Emulator point allows the to emulate a Whessoe Varec Model 6820 Tank Scanning Unit TSU This point provides access for level temperature data and EMU gauge status information from any type of tank gauge interface supported by the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Parameters The database parameters used by the EMU point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to EMU 00 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data F feet m Millimeters M Meters I Inches P ft in 16ths The LevelUnits need to match the units specified during the gauge setup Varec Inc 67 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data TempUnitsSpecifies the engineering units for the temperature data F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup DensityUnits Spe
195. he user is able to edit point data Exiting this dialog box returns the user to the main window Note Several other methods can be used to display the Edit Point dialog box These meth ods and other information are explained in greater detail in the Application section Delete This option lets the user delete one point at a time The user is able to delete an existing point by clicking the delete icon from the toolbar or by selecting Delete Point from the Point menu The Select Point to Delete dialog appears 106 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit SELECT POINT TO DELETE Point Type 01 Digital Inputs Point 8 01 08 or Figure 8 8 Point Deletion Dialog Point deletion dialog This dialog box displays a list of defined point types and corresponding point numbers The point icon is also displayed for identification as well as the tag if a tag has been assigned The user selects the point type and the corresponding number to be deleted The Config Menu E ViewRTU Test rcf Lon File Point Config Communications Options Help Download Database to RTU Ctrl D Upload Database from RTU Ctrl U SpreadSheet Password Modify Password Create Database HEX File Figure 8 9 The Configuration Menu Download Database to RTU The Download Database to RTU option is used to download configuration data to the 8130 RTU The followi
196. hen selected a dialog box appears displaying a list of configuration files All configuration files are identified by the RCF extension Once a file is selected the point configuration data of the selected file is displayed If the directory is empty the user has the option of creating a new file by typing in the file name Save The user is able to save the opened configuration file by clicking the Save icon from the tool bar or by selecting Save from the File menu The user can save the file anytime the configuration has changed If the file exists in the directory the configuration is stored to the disk using the current file name If the file has not been saved before or the name does not exist in the directory the user is prompted to enter a configuration file name Save As The Save As option is used to save the currently opened file under a different name When selected a dialog box appears prompting the user to enter a file name If the selected file name already exists the user has the option of overwriting the file Otherwise the user can create a separate file containing all the current configuration data of the present file If the user chooses to create a separate file the current file is automatically closed Only one file may be open at a time 104 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Exit The Exit option is used to close the ViewRTU application If the current configuration file has not b
197. igure and view data points in the 8130 RTU ViewRTU is a utility program that can be used for configuration diagnostics data acquisition and control Because ViewRTU follows the Windows standard the user that is familiar with Windows is able to learn the program quickly ViewRTU supports the Windows standard of selecting commands from a series of pull down menus If the user is not familiar with Windows based programs then refer to the Microsoft Windows manual for basic instruction System Requirements The minimum requirements needed to run the ViewRTU application are listed below 386 486 Pentium Personal Computer Microsoft Windows NT 2000 XP or Windows 7 96 MB RAM 2 MB free disk space 1 Com Port Installing View To install the ViewRTU application follow the steps listed below Installing ViewRTU 1 Insert the CD into the CDROM or DVDROM drive 2 Select the drive that contains the disk from the Windows File Manager 3 Double click on the SETUP EXE file The setup program prompts the user for the drive and directory used to install the software 4 Select the drive and type in the directory name Once the drive and directory are selected the setup program copies all of the files to the chosen destination 5 When all of the files have been copied to the destination the setup program automatically builds a program group with corresponding program items in the Windows Program Man ager Executing View
198. in conjunction with almost any point that produces a floating point data value Typical examples are the Analog Input Al and TankGate points Any of the tank gauging points can also be used The result can be passed on to other points that require a coded data type for input Varec Inc 53 8130 RTU Software Blocks For example the Pump Control point can monitor a Flow Reference FlowRef in order to determine if there is good flow in the system The FlowRef needs to be a coded value If a flow switch is used then a Digital Input DI point can be used directly However if a flow transmitter that provides a 4 20 mA signal is used then a means is required to determine the flow status i e Normal Low or High An AI point is used to interface to the flow signal The user can set the TripLow and TripHigh parameters in the AISTAT point to define the flow status The AISTAT can be used with a variety of points that require two or three states in order to function Alarm Selector ALSEL TThe Alarm Selector point incorporates multiple input values to produce a single out function Its operation is similar to an 8 input OR gate The ALSEL value can be used as a reference value for another point such as a digital alarm In addition an ALSEL value can be used as the input reference to another ALSEL Parameters The database parameters used by the ALSEL point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters
199. in milliseconds for the delay between scans The default is 500 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F Feet M Meters Default is F TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is F DensityConvert Determines the units in which the density data will be displayed A API L Ibs cu ft K kgs m3 If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default setting for this point is A Dynamic Parameters Function ScanCmd Enable allows the 8130 to scan the Modbus devices for data Disable will stop data scanning ID Address of slave device Varec Inc 125 Dynamic Parameters Function Cmd Current command Values include Read Output Status 2 Read Input Status 3 Read Output Registers 4 Read Input Registers 5 Force Single Coil 6 Preset Single Register 15 Force Multiple Coils 16 Preset Multiple Registers Pnt Point currently being scanned This is usually an MIREG or MFPREG point NumRequests Number of scan requests since the last reset NumTrans Number of completed transactions NumComErrors Number of
200. in the cases where flow switches are used If the PressRef is not specified or if the PressDelay is 00 00 00 this feature is disabled FlowDelay The amount of time after a Start command that the FlowValue status is checked The FlowValue is derived from the FlowRef reference Normally if the FlowValue is not Normal the pump will be stopped Setting the FlowDelay will hold off the shutdown decision immediately after a Start in order to allow the system to stabilize If the FlowRef is not specified or if the FlowDelay is 00 00 00 this feature is disabled TimeToStop The TimeToStop parameter can be used as a condition for determining when to stop the pump The TimeToStop is added to the CommandTime and at that time the pump will be stopped The CommandTime is set when a Start Command is issued This feature is useful to command the pump to run for a specific period or can be used in conjunction with other parameters as a secondary means for pump shutdown Setting the TimeToStop parameter to 00 00 00 disables this feature 80 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function FlowSetPoint The FlowSetPoint parameter sets a flow totalization goal which determines when the pump is stopped The FlowTotal is continually monitored and when the FlowTotal is greater than or equal to the FlowsetPoint the pump is stopped The TotalRef must be configured in order for
201. incremented every 10 msec with the initial value of O equal to Jan 1 1970 at 00 00 00 timezone Time zone relative to GMT The timezone is entered in seconds Example Eastern Time Zone 18000 Pacific 28800 daylight Daylight Savings Flag Command Activator CMNDR The Command Activator point permits event based processing The CMNDR point MOR a command Parameters continually scans a reference point and based upon the value of the reference activates The database parameters used by the CMNDR point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the process being monitored The default tag is set to CMNDR 0O Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to CMNDR 00 PntRef Input point reference for the CMNDR point to monitor The CMNDR point interfaces to integer and coded data values ControlRef Control reference for controlling the operation of the CMNDR point The ControlRef is be used to enable disable the processing of the CMNDR point OutputLink The output link for the OutputCmd Value 0 7 Coded value us
202. ined for comm fail processing Varec Inc 93 8130 RTU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function CommStatus Communications status The CommStatus is determined by the RefValues and the Mode parameter If Mode 1 then all of the RefValues must be Offline in order for comm fail processing to occur If Mode 2 then any of the RefValues can be offline for comm fail processing Control If the Control is set to Disable then the WDOG point is disabled and no comm fail processing will take place RefValue1 RefValue4 RefValuel 4 are the values of the PntRefl 4 parameter references The references can be to any point that produces a coded value Furthermore the only value that has any meaning is a value of Offline A DI CREG or other point type can be configured to produce a coded value PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time the WDOG point last executed PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The WDOG point is the means a user has to turn off outputs if the 8130 RTU goes offline The WDOG point monitors a COM or other point and if the CommStatus goes to Offline the WDOG point will notify all the DO and AO points Th
203. int The Edit Point window is identified by the Point Description and associated current Point Number listed at the top of the window Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit This window contains two list boxes and a series of icons The top list box contains the configuration parameters of the point while the bottom list box contains Dynamic and Command parameters The first column contains the name of the parameter and the second column contains descriptions of the parameters The third column of the Configuration parameters section contains the default data The user can change a value by double clicking an entry and entering the new variable If a 8130 RTU is connected and on line the third column of the Dynamic parameters will update in real time Edit Point Window Icons The user is able to perform a series of functions from selecting the icons found in the bottom of the Edit Point window Each icon is described below Minimize The Minimize icon creates a mini window of selected parameters This icon enables the user to observe relationships between dynamic parameters and how the changes affect the point Clicking the Minimize shrinks the window so that only one or more selected list box parameters are displayed The user may have multiple minimize windows opened simultaneously This capability is useful for testing and debugging Minimizing the Edit Point Window 1 Highlight by single clicking the lef
204. ints to the database Delete Points Delete points from the database Edit Points Edit points in the database by point Edit Tags Edit points in the database by tag With this function you can only edit the points that have tags Set the point tags in ViewRTU Enter Password Enter a Level 1 or Level 2 password to allow you to make changes to the database The LDI also lets you view points in the 8130 RTU in the following ways List Points List all points in the database Update Mode Continuously list database points you specify in ViewRTU Select the points and set the update rate in ViewRTU Internal Diagnostics DIAG O0 Tank Mode Displays data from TANK points The following diagram maps out the process for performing 8130 RTU functions with the LDI The following diagram provides an overview of the LDI menus and their functions LDI Title Screen Password List Point Edit Tags Update Mode Tank Mode J Add Point eiil AA ll Select Point Select Point Select Point LDI Lists all Select Tag LDI lists the Limits your LDI displays Enter your Type Type existing RTU points you LDI functions help screens level 1 or level points specified in to tanks only 2 password ViewRTU s DIAG 00 a Enter number to edit Edit point data Enter number Enter number to add to delete LDI adds the LDI celeres me pp LDI changes point to the point from the Edit point data the point in
205. ion for more information on opening ViewRTU If needed select a DVR file and click OK The ViewRTU window appears Click Options and select Configure Tank Gauges If more than one Tank Definition File TDF file exists the system prompts you to select which one you want to use If needed select a TDF file and click OK The Tank Gauge Configurator window appears Varec Inc 131 Using Tank Gauge Configurator C3 ViewRTU Test TCF Hog Ele Point Config Communications Options Help oee lax e Tank i Gauge Quantity Configuration File RTU Status Online RTU Description Undefined System Version ITT1_04 TDF m A 8 UNIT TANK STRAP O I Figure 9 1 Main Tank Gauge Configurator Window with Descriptions ViewRTU window This main window allows the user to perform the commands necessary to configure the Tank Gauge It contains Windows components such as the Application Control menu title bar and menu bar The System Status Area The System Status area displays the system version as well as general information about the configuration file The Tank Gauge file name is found in both the System Status area and the title bar The Toolbar The Toolbar contains several button icons used to execute frequently used commands found in the menu bar In the menu description below each appears next to its associated menu option The Spreadsheet Summary Th
206. is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the TM4590 point on the Model 8203 Model 8213 or Model 8211 and verifies it is scanning for gauges Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function Level IEEE Floating point value representing the tank level The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge If using V1 or Whessoe Bus The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or WBSCAN point Level Floating point value representing the uncorrected Tank Level Temp Floating point value representing the product temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge If using V1 or Whessoe Bus Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter of the appropriate V1SCAN or WBSCAN point TopPress Floating Point value representing the Top Pressure MidPress Floating Point value representing the Middle Pressure BotPress Floating Point value representing the Bottom Pressure Density Floating point value representing the density If using V1 the Density can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the DensityConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN point Water Le
207. is ignored by the 8130 RTU Mode Rate calculation mode will calculate the Rate parameter using changes in the Value and the time interval between scans 1 will use the hardware registers and the real time interrupt to calculate the Rate The default is 1 The Mode parameter only applies if the Module is the Model 8204 Period Totalization time period Valid values are One Hour Eight Hours One Day One Week The default is One Day Factor Scaling factor which allows for conversion of one set of units to another For example if the RefValue is gal min and the totalized value needs to be represented in barrels a value may be entered into the Factor parameter which allows the conversion of gal min to barrel min The Factor is applied prior to totalization The default is 1 0 ContactType Specifies whether contact is Normally Open or Normally Closed Valid values are NO or NC If Normally Open NO counting takes place on contact closures The default is NO The ContactType only applies if the Module is 8201 IntPeriod The integration time period in msecs used for the Rate calculation For example if the IntPeriod is set to 2500 then the Rate is calculated every 2 5 seconds A longer IntPeriod yields a more accurate and stable Rate The default is 5000 5 seconds TimeUnits Time Units used for the Rate calculation Valid values are Seconds Minutes Hours DAYS The TimeUnits parameter
208. is read from the database converted to the corresponding field data and then written to the appropriate output In the case of pulsed Digital Outputs they are deactivated after the preset time Database Manager The Database Manager is a collection of programs and data The Database Manager allows the 8130 RTU system executive to access data from the database in an organized and program independent manner It resides in non volatile RAM The Database Manager also contains a Database Dictionary This dictionary describes how the database is organized and also provides information describing how data should be presented to the operator After power up or system reset a CRC verification of each point in the database is performed If the CRC does not have a match for the point then it is disabled and a flag is set indicating that the point is invalid Varec Inc 11 Hardware and Software System Tasks System tasks include the Calendar Task which manages Time and Date functions Other system tasks include utility routines for checksum calculations diagnostics start up and initialization 12 Installation and Operations Manual 3 Installation Before attempting installation review the Safety Precautions below Installation and maintenance personnel should become familiar with any hazards present as well as any agency requirements before working with any equipment General Safety Guidelines The 8130 is certi
209. ith the FlowSetPoint the PUMP point can use a flow total to control pump operation The PUMP point will issue a Reset command to the TotalRef to reset the ATOT or PTOT Value parameter to 0 when a pump Start command is issued ControlRef The ControlRef is a reference to a point that provides a coded value of Enable and Disable A DI point can be configured for this purpose as well as a number of other point types The value specified by the ControlRef is stored locally in the Control parameter If the Control parameter is Enable then the pump is allowed to start in response to a Start command The user may also set the Control parameter is desired StatusDelay The StatusDelay is the amount of time to wait before checking the ValueRef the pump status to see if the pump started The data referenced by the ValueRef is stored locally in the Value parameter After a Start command is issued the PUMP point will wait the amount of time specified by the StatusDelay and check the ValueRef to ensure that the pump started properly If the Value is anything other than On then the pump will be stopped PressDelay The amount of time after a Start command that the PressValue status is checked The PressValue is derived from the PressRef reference Normally if the PressValue is not Normal the pump will be stopped Setting the PressDelay will hold off the shutdown decision immediately after a Start in order to allow the system to stabilize
210. k 112 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Export AII The Export All option allows the user to export all of the database in the 8130 RTU Each point type is exported to a file in the CSV file format For example the Analog Input points are all exported to the file Al CSV This means that the user can not specify each file name as the data is exported The user does have the ability to specify the directory to export the data to The user must create and then select the subdirectory for the export operation We suggest that you organize the directories with names corresponding to the 8130 RTU address If you have two 8130 RTU s use the Windows File Manager program to create subdirectories VIEWRTU RTU1 and VIEWRTU RTU2 All of the files for 8130 1 should be written to VIEWRTU RTU1 8130 RTU 2 s data would go to VIEWRTU RTU2 and so on The exported data can be edited using a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel or a database program like Microsoft Access Many programs can read and write data in the CSV file format You can make backups of your RCF file by exporting the data in the CSV file format The exported data can be read back with the Import option The Spreadsheet Mode also has an option to import CSV file data Import The Import All option allows the user to import the entire 8130 RTU database Each point type must have been exported previously in order to import data
211. l parameters The user can read up to 64 registers from the slave device The meaning of the Value array depends upon the definition of the blocks PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response from Device Elapse Time of the last request from the master PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The MFPREG point continually scans Modbus slave devices using the ID parameter The Module and Chan determine which Model 8203 Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 etc If the Module parameter is set to 0 the MFPREG point will use one of the communications channels on the 8130 RTU Motherboard An MFPREG point is needed for each device connected to the 8130 RTU Up to 64 registers may be read with each MFPREG point Multiple MFPREG points can be used with a single slave device if necessary The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the slave device The communications parameters are set as each MFPREG point is processed This allows slaves with different baud rates and data link settings to exist on the same bus not recommended A total of four blocks may be read or written The ReadCmd determines the command to read data and the WriteCmd is the command used for write operations The Addr and Size parameters determin
212. l and flow Bottom sediment amp water BS amp W Pump status amp control Valve status amp control Emergency shut off Leak Detection Local indication amp alarms Specifications Memory 16 Bit Microprocessor and Support Circuitry Varec Inc Overview 516K bytes Program Memory 128K bytes Non Volatile Database Memory DC Power Requirements 5 DC VOLT worst case 2 A 15 VOLT worst case 75 mA Combined total worst case 12 25 Watts 24 VOLT nominal per active Digital Output 60 mA 24 VOLT nominal per active Digital Input 2 mA 24 VOLT maximum per Analog Input 25 mA VOLT maximum per Analog Output 22 mA Combined total worst case 26 7 Watts AC Power Requirements 120 VAC 400 mA 240 VAC 200 mA Host Slave Communications Physical Selectable Data Rate 1200 to 19200 Baud RS 232 or RS 485 communications RS 485 Maximum Cable Length 24 AWC 4000 Feet RS 485 Maximum Cable Length 18 AWG 10000 Feet RS 485 Maximum Multi dropped Units 32 8130 RTU Case 16 H x 9 1 2W x 2 1 2 D Enclosure 24 H x 20 W x 6 5 8 D NEMA 4 Environmental Operating Temperature 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C Storage Temperature 40 F to 212 F 40 C to 100 C Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing Recommended Enclosure NEMA 4 12 Digital Inputs Maximum Quantity 32 Isolation Voltage 4000 VAC Operating Voltage 24 VDC 120 VAC or 240 VAC Digital Outputs Maximum Quantity 32 Isolation
213. l Low Level 0x0002 Advisory Low Level 0x0004 Advisory High Level 0x0008 Critical High Level 0x0010 Critical Low Temperature 0x0020 Advisory Low Temperature 0x0040 Advisory High Temperature 0x0080 Critical High Temperature 0x0100 Hardware Input 1 0x0200 Hardware Input 2 GaugeStatus Integer value indicating status of the gauge Integer Register 6 Values are 0x0001 Bad Level 0x0002 Bad Temp 0x0004 Bad EE 0x0008 Bad EE Checksum 0x0010 Bad RAM 0x0020 Bad EEPROM 0x0040 Local Modifications 0x0080 No Calculation 0x0100 CFG Error 0x0200 Calc Error 0x0400 Bad CPU Board 0x0800 Bad Comm Board 0x1000 Low Encoder Battery LevelRef Calibration Level The LevelRef provides a means to calibrate the level in the Model 4000 MSTX Set the LevelRef and then issue a Calibrate command PntStatus Integer HEX value indicating status of point Values are 0x0001 Gauge Not Responding 0x0008 Bad Level 0x0010 Bad Temp 0x0020 Bad EE 0x0040 Bad EE Checksum 0x0080 Bad RAM 0x0100 Bad EEPROM 0x0200 Local Modifications 0x0400 No Calculation 0x0800 CFG Error 0x1000 Calc Error 0x2000 Bad CPU Board 0x4000 Bad Comm Board 0x8000 Low Encoder Battery Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Varec Inc 111 Application The MBTX point provides an interface to Varec Model 4000 Advanced Technology Transmitters
214. larm High Any PntRef1 16 value equal to Hi or HiHi gt Value Alarm HiHi Any PntRef1 16 value equal to High gt Value Alarm If a PntRef is not defined it is not used in the alarm logic Interfacing to Other Points The ALSEL point is often used in conjunction with an analog alarm point AAL or a digital alarm point DAL If an alarm is generated by several sources these sources can be used as input references into the ALSEL point The Value parameter can then be used as the input to a DAL point The DAL point will be activated by an alarm from any of the input sources Byte Register BREG The Byte Register point provides a byte of storage It is often used for inter point BREG Parameters communications where no other means is provided The database parameters used by the BREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value Byte value Clock CLK The Clock point provides access to the System Clock Standard time format is in the form of MM DD YY 55 Varec Inc 55 8130 RTU Software Blocks Parameters The database parameters used by the CLK point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function TZ Time Zone string Dynamic Parameters Function SysTime System Time in the form MM DD YY HH MM SS Writing to this value will change the system time SysTicks Time if ticks format Ticks are
215. lation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit za A 5 CT CONFIGURE TANK GAUGE Point Help I E Current Point ft jo Point Desc TANK 00 ITT Barton 3500 Tank Config TANK GAUGE CONFIGURATION DATA MessageNum Message ID um Tank Label Tank 1 Level HiHi Setpoint 24 5 Level Hi Setpoint 9999 0 Level Lo Setpoint 9999 0 Level LoLo Setpoint 9999 0 Volume HiHi Setpoint 9999 0 Volume Hi Setpoint 9999 0 Volume Lo Setpoint 9999 0 Volume LoLo Setpoint 9999 0 Temperature HiHi Setpoint 9999 0 Temperature Hi Setpoint Config Command Data Source 0 DeviceT ype Device Type 1 Timeout Max time for transaction 10 Domain LON Domain 0 LON Subnet 1 Next Download Examine Previous Upload Exit Figure 9 19 Edit Digital Point Dialog Edit Point Dialog This window is used to view and modify the tank gauge configuration and header parameters of the selected point The Edit Point window is identified by the Point Description and associated current Point Number listed at the top of the window This window contains two list boxes and a series of buttons The top list box contains the configuration parameters of the point while the bottom list box contains header parameters The first column contains the name of the parameter and the second column contains descriptions of the parameters The third column of the Configuration parameters section contai
216. lication Title bar Minimize Control menu Menubar Toolbar icon Maximize icon 1 ViewRTU Tank34 CF S Ele Pont Config Communications Options He OES Bee w Spreadsheet Summary System Status Point Icons Configuration File Tank34 RCF RTU Status Online RTU Description Undefined System Version RTU3_17 DVR Pointicon Selection Area 8 gt SYS COM CLK 10 Figure 8 2 Main ViewRTU Window with Descriptions ViewRTU Window This main window allows the user to configure the 8130 RTU The ViewRTU window contains the standard Windows components such as the Application Control menu minimize maximize icon buttons title bar and menu bar The System Status Area Displays the system version as well as general information about the configuration file The 8130 RTU file name is found in both the System Status area and the title bar The Toolbar Contains several icons used to execute frequently used commands found in the menu bar In the menu description below each appears next to its associated menu option The Spreadsheet Summary Lists all the point types and corresponding number defined in the file The Spreadsheet Mode can be used as a quick method for creating and editing the contents of each point by double clicking the desired point type The parameters listed in the Spreadsheet summary directly correlate with each defined point Point Icon Selection Area
217. lists each point It also shows a point s tag if one exists To list points using the LDI screen Viewing a list of all points 1 From the main menu press lt L gt The system lists the 8130 RTU database points DI 0 Pumpl DI 2 Pump3 DI 4 Pump Backup DI 6 Reserve Pump Figure 10 10 Point List 2 Press ENTER to scroll through the points If a tag exists the LDI displays it with the point Edit Tags From the LDI you can edit points in the 8130 RTU by referring to their tag To change an existing tag Edit points via their Tag 1 From the main menu press T The LDI screen lists the existing tags Pumpl Pump2 3 Pump3 to edit N H Figure 10 11 Tag List 2 Press lt ENTER gt to scroll through the tags 3 When the tag you want to edit appears on the screen press the number to the left of the tag you want to change The tag information appears From this screen you can change point data just as you can when you edit a point 158 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Figure 10 12 Tag Information 4 Press ENTER to scroll through the tag point s data 5 When the information you want to change appears enter the new information in its place and press ENTER Update Mode In ViewRTU you can configure the LDI to continuously display certain points To program which points you want the LDI
218. lls black outline 124 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit 1 Select the cells on which the copied cells will be pasted 2 Select the Paste option from the Edit menu CT SPREADSHEET MODE B Point Edit Options Tag Description v 1 VCP1 Hand Off Auto Switch 1 p u 1 vcPt HoA Hand VCP1 HandjOff Auto Switch 2 2 VCP1 Closed St YCP1 Valve Status 3 3 vcP1 Open Stat VCP1 Valve Status 4 5 6 Channel ChanQuan 4 VCP2 HOA VCP2 Hand Off Auto Switch nm 5 2 Hand VCP2 Hand Off Auto Switch p u vcP2 closed st wCP2ValveSttus 7 1 Stat _ ol ul CP2 Closed St VCP2 Valve Status 7 1 s CP2 Open Stat VCP2 Valve Status 8 1 01 10 1 10 11 1 Figure 8 35 Spreadsheet Mode Copying and Pasting Point Parameter Data Rows Note Ifthe number of rows and columns in both selections do not match the extra copied cells are truncated Incompatible cells containing different data types are not copied instead a warning is displayed Paste amp Dnld The Paste amp Dnld option is very similar to the Paste menu selection The only difference is that the Paste amp Dnld selection downloads the updated data parameters Set Value The Set Value option allow
219. lso specified If the RefValue equals one of the Compare parameters the Value for that timer Varec Inc 89 8130 RTU Software Blocks increments At the transition from false to true for a timer the Counter for the timer is incremented After the time designated by the Period elapses the Value and Counter parameters are stored to PrevValue0 3 and Counter0 3 The AlarmTime0 3 is used to set time out values for each of the four timers The TimeUnits parameter is used to determine whether the AlarmTime is in Minutes Hours or Days Interfacing to Other Points The PntRef specifies which point the TIMER point will time The point parameter being referenced must be in coded data format Tag Register TREG The Tag Register point provides four bytes of storage in the character format It is often Ls used for inter point communications where no other means is provided Parameters The database parameters used by the TREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value 30 character text string Unsigned Long Integer Register ULREG ULREG The Unsigned Long Integer Register point provides four bytes of storage It is often used for inter point communications where no other means is provided Parameters The database parameters used by the ULREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value Unsigned Long integer 4 bytes value
220. lue Store Cancel Figure 8 27 Edit Point Parameter Reference Dialog Edit point parameter reference dialog This dialog box is used to select a new point reference corresponding point reference number and or parameter If displayed from the Edit Point window the selection lists the default value If displayed from the Point Connections window the most consistent value is selected as the default Varec Inc Using ViewRTU Only valid references appear in the list boxes contained in this dialog box The new reference can then be downloaded to the 8130 RTU or stored locally if the 8130 RTU is off line To Modify Strap Tables To modify strapping tables in ViewRTU the user will select Edit Strap Tables from the Options menu The Modify Strap Tables dialog appears E Edit Strap Table Strap Table Entries 7 Level Units Edit Entry ft in 16ths S 15 00 00 17021 00 C ftin Bths Level Volume decimal ft inches ft in 16ths U S Gallons f mm 0 00 Options 01 00 00 1003 00 AT 0300 00 5238 00 Add Replace meters 10 00 00 12635 00 15 00 00 17021 00 Delete Volume Units Import 0 5 Gallons C Barrels 01 Export Auto Config C Liters f cubic meters Check Gallons Tank Params ii teen Figure 8 28 Edit Strap Table Dialog Edit Strap Table Dialog This dialog box allows you modify tank gauge strap
221. m Millimeters M Meters If no value is specified no conversion will be performed Note that the LevelUnits must be set properly If the LevelUnits and the LevelConvert are the same no conversion is performed TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data read from the REX F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The default is C TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is C All LowRange Analog Input 1 Low Range All HighRange Analog Input 1 High Range Varec Inc 139 Configuration Parameters Function Al2LowRange Analog Input 42 Low Range Al2HighRange Analog Input 2 High Range Al3LowRange Analog Input 3 Low Range Al3HighRange Analog Input 3 High Range ValueMin Minimum Analog Input Integer Value ValueMax Maximum Analog Input Integer Value LevelDeadband Specifies the amount of change in the Level that must occur for the level to be updated each Change of State period The default is 0 1 Mode Operational Mode Values are 0x02 Communication via FCU Tempinterleave Temperature Interleave Factor Determines how often the temperature is read The default is 10 which means that every te
222. mandTime is used with the PressDelay FlowDelay and StatusDelay parameters OpCondition The current operating condition Valid values are Pump Off Vibration Alarm Shutdown High Temp Alarm Shutdown Pressure Alarm Shutdown Flow Alarm Shutdown Pump Start Initiated HOA is not in Auto Control is disabled Pump Start Timeout O WON AU BRWN o Pump Running 10 General Alarm Shutdown AlarmControl The AlarmControl parameter is an output of the PUMP point that is either Enable or Disable The AlarmControl can be used as a ControlRef parameter in a DAL point to control the alarm operation For example the AlarmStatus would be the PntRef parameter for the DAL point The AlarmControl could be assigned to the DAL point s ControlRef in order to enable and disable the alarm processing of the DAL point HOAValue The current Hand Off Auto status as specified by the HOARef If the HOARef is entered then the pump is only allowed to run if the HOAValue is Auto VibValue The current vibration status as specified by the VibrationRef If the VibrationRef is entered then the pump will run only if the VibValue is Normal Varec Inc 81 8130 RTU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function TempValue The current temperature status as specified by the TempRef If the TempRef is entered then the pump will run only if the TempValue is Normal PressValue The Pressure status
223. mber of samples is determined by the Filter parameter A check is made each time a new reading is made by comparing the values in the temporary buffer If the data changes by a value less than the LevelFilter it is considered to be reasonable and it is accepted into the Level Used only on the Model 8213 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Level Temp Position changes Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 240 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the SG6000 point on the Model 8203 or Model 8213 and verifies it is scanning for gauges 104 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function Command The Command parameter allows the user to issue a single command to the gauge Valid commands include Bo
224. me Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 240 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the X76CTM point on the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module fails the 0x0010 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Function Level IEEE Floating point value representing the tank level The data is returned in inches during the configuration of the gauge WaterLevel Floating point value representing the product water interface level Level is returned in inches GrossVolume Floating point value representing the Product Volume Units are gallons TotalGVolume Units are gallons Temp Floating point value representing the product temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge NetVolume Floating point value representing the Standard Product Volume Units are gallons LeakRate Uni
225. meter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point DensityTemp The temperature when a density measurement was made using a Bottom Density Middle Density or Upper Density command Elapse Time of last scan Interval Amount of time in HR MIN SEC between scans of the gauge DiagCode Diagnostic code GaugeStatus Coded value indicating status of the gauge The GaugeStatus can have the following values Upper Int Level Searching or following the upper interface level Mid Int Level Searching or following the middle interface level Bottom Searching or following the bottom Following Level Displacer is following product level Calibration Act Automatic gauge calibration is in progress Bottom Density Measuring the Bottom Density Middle Density Measuring the Middle Density Upper Density Measuring the Upper Density Raising The displacer is raising Stopped The displacer is stopped Rel Over Tens The displacer cable tension has exceeded the maximum value PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 8203 and 8213 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 Gauge is offline 8211 Only 0x0010 Device Not Responding 0x0020 CRC Error 0x0040 Invalid Command 0x0080 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8211 has stopped updating 106 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameter
226. meters The following parameters are found in almost all point types These parameters are described below PntCheckSum Parameter The PntCheckSum is a CRC 16 checksum of the Configuration Parameters of a point Most points have the PntCheckSum parameter a few like the CLK Clock Point DIAG Diagnostics Point and the register points BREG IREG and DREG do not Any time a Configuration Parameter is changed the 8130 RTU re calculates the checksum The PntCheckSum is used at initialization to validate each point in the database PntStatus Parameter The PntStatus parameter gives information about point execution Refer to the information provided for each Software Block about the particular use of the PntStatus parameter Elapse Parameter The Elapse parameter usually indicates the time of the last point execution It is used as the basis for automatic Change of State notifications Varec Inc 41 8130 RTU Software Blocks Value Parameter The Value parameter indicates the real time value of the point In the case of DI points the Value represents a Coded value i e On Off Opened Closed etc Al points represent the Value in an IEEE floating point format In most cases the Value parameter is one of the most important parameters for a point Level amp Temp Parameters The Level amp Temp parameters indicate the real time tank level and temperature of the tank gauge point There are many Software Blocks a
227. ming a Hard Reset A special form of Reset is available for occasions when the battery backed up database must be reinitialized A Hard Reset should be performed before a database is downloaded from the portable PC or hand held terminal display Caution A Hard Reset clears the installed database To perform a Hard Reset 1 Simultaneously press the Reset On line and Output Enable buttons 2 Release Reset Continue pressing other buttons until the red ERROR LED light comes ON 3 Release the Online and Output Enable button Varec Inc 165 Troubleshooting NO TTT TTT TTT I 2 Seconds 1 1 ES 7e CPU 79 Self Test Sequence 362 Error N Figure 11 3 8130 RTU Hard Reset The Hard Reset should be used as a last resort if the 8130 RTU is not functioning A Hard Reset clears the installed database 8130 RTU Motherboard Power Adjustments and Verification Power Supply Adjustment To adjust the power supply 1 Measure 24V power supply voltage across pin 19 and pin 1 common of P1 2 Adjust R101 until the value equals 24 00V Supply Voltage Verification Verify that the supply voltages at Power Connector P1 are as described in the following table Pin Numbers Voltage Pin 19 and Pin 1 common 24V Pin 39 and Pin 1 common 24V Pin 21 and Pin 1 common 5V Pin 40 and Pin 1 common 15V Pin 20 a
228. mparator Test Once these test are completed the ReplyData parameter will display an Ok ABCDE or an error code Exxx ReadCmd MG5000 High level memory read commands Valid commands are Ox4B Read number of floats and number of RTDs Ox4C Read gradient control variable Ox4D Read float zero position data Ox4E Read RTD position data Ox4F Read factory serial number and software version data 0x50 Read firmware control code 0x51 Read hardware control code Once these test are completed the ReplyData parameter will display the data transmitted from the MG5000 gauge WriteCmd MG5000 High level memory write commands These commands are used in conjunction with the WriteData parameter to write data to the MG5000 gauge The data must first be written in the proper format to the WriteData parameter then the WriteCmd can be executed Valid commands are 0x55 Write number of floats and number of RTDs 0x56 Write gradient control variable 0x57 Write float zero position data 0x58 Write float zero position data using MG5000 calibrate mode 0x59 Write RTD position data 0x54 Write firmware control code Ox5B Write hardware control code Ox5E Write update reference magnet position Once these test are completed the ReplyData parameter will display the written data The WriteStatus parameter will display OK if the write was completed successfully or an error code Exxx CmdsSt
229. mpare3 is in alarm The AlarmTime is used with the TimeUnits parameters TimeUnits The TimeUnits is used in conjunction with the AlarmTime0 3 parameters to determine the status of the Alarm0 3 parameters 88 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Period Totalization time period Valid values are One Hour Eight Hours One Day One Week The default is One Day Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65525 seconds The default is 240 Dynamic Parameters Function ResetCmd ResetCmd is used to issue a reset This command returns the value in Value to 0 RefValue The value of the parameter specified by PntRef ValueO Value3 ValueO Value3 are the current values for each timer
230. n Level Floating point value representing the tank level The Level will be presented in decimal feet GaugeStatus Gauge Status Rate Level Rate TankLevel Tank Level Ullage Ullage Analog Analog Current 1 Analog2 Analog Current 2 Analog3 Analog Current 3 140 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function Temp6 Temperature 6 Temp5 Temperature 5 Temp4 Temperature 4 Temp3 Temperature 3 Temp2 Temperature 2 Templ Temperature 1 TempFilter 16 Bit Status Code that determines if a temperature element is in liquid Register 19 For example Bit 0 1 means Temp 1 is in liquid For further explanation see the REX documentation TempStatus 16 Bit Code that determines the Blocked status of the temperature elements Register 1A For example Bit 1 means Temp 1 is Blocked For further explanation see the REX documentation TempDiagCode 16 Bit Error Code that determines the status of the temperature elements Register 1B For example Bit 1 means Temp 1 is in Error For further explanation see the REX documentation Temp Average Temperature PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No error 0x0001 Gauge Not Responding 0x0010 FCU is offline if Mode 0x02 0x1000 Weights amp Measure Seal is Enabled 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8212 This bit is set if the Wat
231. n menu To modify a value 1 In the Configure Tank Gauge window double click the desired parameter to open the parameter for modification The following window Modify value appears eo CT CONFIGURE TANK GAUGE TANK GAUGE CONFIGURATION DATA Tank Number Tank Label Level HiHi Setpoint Level Hi Setpoint Level Lo Setpoint Level LoLo Setpoint Volume HiHi Setpoint Volume Hi Setpoint Volume Lo Setpoint Volume LoLo Setpoint Temperature Hi Setpoint Config Command Data Source DeviceT ype Device Type Timeout Max time for transaction i LON Domain LON Subnet Figure 9 20 Modify Value Window 2 Enter the new parameter and click store Point Desc TANK_00 ITT Barton 3500 Tank Config Temperature HiHi Setpoint Next Download Examine Previous Upload Exit 144 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Figure 9 21 Edit Point Parameter Value Dialog In this dialog box the user is able to enter a value for the selected parameter The dialog box varies according to the selected parameter In some dialog boxes the user is able to enter the name or data directly in the edit box Other dialogs contain a list from which the user selects a value The new value can then be downloaded to the 8130 RTU or stored locally if the 8130 RTU is offline To Modify Strap Tables To modify strapping tables the user will double click the Strap Table entry in the Edit Point
232. n the 8130 RTU The SCALER point monitors one or more database reference values and performs an SCALER iar equation in the form Value Ax By Cz B amp K are user entered constants amp z are inputs from other database points Parameters The database parameters used by the SCALER point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Eng Converter The default tag is set to SCALER 00 PntRef1 The PntRef parameters determine the input source for the SCALER point PntRef2 to monitor Up to three references may be specified RefValuel is the X PntRef3 term PntRef2 is the Y term and PntRef3 is the Z term If a reference is nthe not specified then it is not used in the equation A Constant that is multiplied with RefValuel The default value is 1 B Constant that is multiplied with RefValue2 The default value is 1 Constant that is multiplied with RefValue3 The default value is 1 K Constant K The default value is O Deadband Change of State deadband The default value is 0 1 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Poi
233. nal 02 to a good earth ground before connecting ANY other wires Refer to the Surge Shield Ground Connector J3 section The Model 8203 has 3 termination points per channel The following schematic illustrates the terminal channels of the COM channels 33 Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Surge Protection wa YR G DATA 1 x DATA 1 y SIGNAL COMMON COM Channel A SURGE GND Ja 1 N DATA Go SIGNAL COMMON Y OR ws GT DATA 1 T COM Channel B Figure 5 5 Model 8203 COM Channels Schematic Note Refer to table at the end of this section Surge Shield Ground Connector J3 Caution This ground connection is important for system safety Surge Shield Ground 1l Connect a 14 AWG copper wire between the ground terminal J3 and a good earth ground Perform this step before connecting ANY other wires 2 Verify that the resistance in this connection does not exceed 1 ohm Network terminating resistor jumpers W4 amp W5 Verify that the network terminating resistor jumpers W4 amp W5 are installed Firmware The firmware determines which protocol the Model 8203 will use The following table shows the protocol options Firmware Version Protocol Software Blocks TIx xx TIWAY TH11 TI121 TH50 MODx_xx Modbus MIREG MFREG MBMFT MBTX RTG
234. namic Parameters Function Value Floating point value representing the Minimum Maximum or Average set by the Mode parameter of the PntRef values RefValue1 8 Floating Point value of a PntRef parameter used to determine the Value parameter Level Level value read from the LevelRef parameter StausFlag Bit status that displays the current reference values being used to determine the output value ErrorCode Error Code 0 means no errors otherwise an error code will be displayed PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The SIGSEL point continually monitors the value of the PntRef1 PntRef8 references and stores the data locally in RefValuel RefValue8 If the Mode is set to Average then the average of the RefValues is calculated If the Mode is set to Maximum then the maximum value is calculated and stored in Value If the Mode is set to Minimum then the minimum value is calculated and stored in Value If a PntRef is not defined then it is ignored The LevelRef parameter can be used to qualify the RefValuel RefValue8 parameters in the calculation The Levell Level8 constants represent levels associated with the Pnt
235. nd Pin 16 common 15V If 24 voltages is out of tolerance adjust the power supply potentiometer R101 166 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit 1 20 21 40 Figure 11 4 Refer to the Figure below for Pin Assignments Varec Inc 167 Troubleshooting 168 Installation and Operations Manual 12 Order Codes 8130 Remote Terminal Unit 10 Power Supply 0 Power supply 90 130 50 60 Hz 1 Power supply 220 240 V4 50 60 Hz 2 Power supply 18 36 Vde 20 Host Emulation 0 Additional options not used 2 TSU emulation Varec Tankview Systems 3 CIU emulation Enraf model 858 CIU interface 30 Special Field Communications O Additional options not used 4 Varec Matrix communication Interfaces to Varec Matrix devices 1600 1700 and requires 8210 8201 amp 8204 modules 5 MODBUS master commuincation uses RTU motherboard communications ports 6 CIU communication Interfaces to existing Enraf 858 CIU devices 60 Calculations 0 Additional options not used 7 Hybrid tank calculations 8 Hydrostatic tank calculations 70 Strapping Tables 0 Additional options not used 9 Embedded tank strapping tables 80 Approvals 0 For use in non hazardous areas 1 FM CI I Div 2 Gr A B C D T3C 3015423 Optional enclosure required 2 CSA CI I Div 2 Gr A B C D LR 40894 Optional enclosure required N8130 Complete product de
236. nd data address requested by the Modbus master system The MODGW provides assurance that requests are being received and processed Modbus I O MFIO MOD The Modbus 1 Module point is used for communicating with Allen Bradley Flex 1 10 Modules The MFIO point lets the user specify what Modbus data is read from the Allen Bradley Module and it also allows data configuration The MFIO point executes on either the 8130 RTU Motherboard or on the 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module MODx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MFIO point are listed and described below 74 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Modbus Slave or Register Valuel The default tag is set to MFIO 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of will use the 8130 RTU Motherboard A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the Allen Bradley is connected to On the Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the Chan can be set to 0 1 or 2 The default value is 0 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 96
237. neficial when editing and viewing multiple points of the same type Spreadsheets of each defined point are found in the Spreadsheet Summary section in the main window There are some differences between the regular and spreadsheet methods First the user is not able to view the Point Connections window in Spreadsheet Mode This mode is used mainly for viewing and entering point data Second the spreadsheet focuses on points of a single type it does not offer a big picture view of multiple point types Adding Multiple Points The user is able to add a point by using the same method used to add single points The user can click on the Add Point icon or button from the toolbar or by selecting Add from the Point menu in the Main window Once the point is added the user is then able to define the point Defined points appear in the Point Icon Selection Area and in the Spreadsheet Summary of the Main window Note The user can add a point by selecting Add from the Point menu in the Spreadsheet Mode window This menu is described later in the section To add Multiple Points 1 Double click on the desired point type in the Spreadsheet Summary The following example Spreadsheet Mode window appears Varec Inc 147 Using Tank Gauge Configurator C1 SPREADSHEET MODE tj Point Edit Options MessageNu UnitNum TankNumbe TankLabel LevelHiHi 1 Tank1 245 11 1 11 2 2 Tank 2 26 0 11 3 3 Tank 3 24 0 11 4 4 Tank 4
238. ng dialog box appears DOWNLOAD RTU CONFIGURATION t3 Number of Points 31 Number of Bytes 4037 Select Download to start Download Figure 8 10 Dialog used to Download 8130 RTU Data Click the Download to download data to the 8130 RTU Varec Inc 107 Using ViewRTU Upload Database from 8130 RTU The Upload option is used to upload configuration data from the 8130 RTU The following dialog box appears p Lt UPLOAD RTU CONFIGURATION Select Upload to start Figure 8 11 Dialog used to Upload 8130 RTU Data Click the Upload icon to download data from the 8130 RTU Once the upload is complete the main window changes to display the uploaded configuration Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet option is used to configure download and upload point data points in spreadsheet mode SELECT POINT TYPE Point Type SYS System Information gn Figure 8 12 Spreadsheet Mode Edit Window Password The user can use the Password option to gain access to a protected file Once a password has been assigned the user must enter the password when attempting to edit the 8130 RTU configuration file This password is only entered once in the duration of the ViewRTU program To enter the password 1 Select Config and click Password 2 Click the edit box in the Password dialog Type in the password 3 Click OK 108 Installation and Operations Manual Remo
239. ng the associated To unhide all the rows columns the user can select the Unhide All option from the Options menu Unhide All The Unhide option allows the user to reveal all of the rows or columns that are currently hidden Creating and Editing Connections Several methods can be used to display this window depending on the user s current location in the program These methods are listed below If in the Main window double left click the point icon 128 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit If in the Edit Point window click the Connections icon If in the Point Connections window double left click a point icon other than the focus point to view the Point Connections window for the selected point Note If multiple points exist a selection window is displayed showing all the available points Figure 8 41 Edit Point Selection Window Displaying the Point Connections window Double click one of the icons to display the Point Connections window The following example Point Connections window appears Figure 8 42 Point Connections Window Varec Inc 129 Using ViewRTU Point Connections Window This graphic display visually illustrates the reference connections of the focus point From this display the user is able to select reference points create connections between these points and enter configuration parameters The point icons located in the Icon Bar utiliz
240. nge scale used for scaling the output values Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when a value changes Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 75 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the MFIO point on the Model 8203 or Model 8217 and verifies it is scanning for gauges Dynamic Parameters Function Valuel Analog Value 1 Value2 Analog Value 2 Value3 Analog Value 3 Value4 Analog Value 4 Value5 Analog Value 5 Value6 Analog Value 6 Value7 Analog Value 7 Value8 Analog Value 8 PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response From Device Elapse Time of last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static
241. nglish or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter in the appropriate MSCAN or RKSCN point The default is I LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F Feet M Meters Default is F Varec Inc 117 Configuration Parameters Function TempuUnits Specifies the engineering units for the temperature data F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter in the appropriate MSCAN or RKSCN point The default is F TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is F LevelOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Level The default is 0 TempOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Temperature The default is 0 ScanCmd Sets the type of command used to poll the transmitter Valid commands are for DDA only L Product level I Product water interface level T Average temperature of the product R Individual RTD temperature If R is used the transmitter will only be scanned for individual RTD temperatures The default is LIT which scans the product interface level and temperature Resolution Sets the precision
242. nner point provides dynamic and statistical information for the communications between the 8130 RTU and the Modbus compatible slave devices For the 8130 RTU Motherboard the MSCAN point is automatically created when the Protocol parameter of a COM point is set to Modbus Master When using the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface the MSCAN point is created when the Motherboard detects the Model 8203 It is not necessary to add an MSCAN point Parameters The database parameters used by the MSCAN point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Module The I O Module the MSCAN point is associated with A value of 0 represents the 8130 Motherboard Module 1 2 3 or 4 represents Model 8203 Modules with addresses 1 4 The MSCAN point is created automatically and the Module is set by the system The Module parameter is automatically set and should not be changed Chan The physical channel J2 or J4 used on the Model 8203 One MSCAN point is created automatically for each channel by the system The Chan parameter is set in each MSCAN point and should not be changed For more information about the Model 8203 COM channels see section 2 2 3 on page 10 MaxRetry Value between 1 10 indicating the number of times the scanner will retry a request to a slave device Default is 2 Timeout Time in milliseconds that a Device must respond to a request Default is 2000 ScanDelay Time
243. nputs The Rate is determined using the IntPeriod TimeUnits and Mode ResetTime The period reset time PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No Error Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The PTOT point executes once a second monitoring the value of the channel and storing the data locally in RawValue This is added to the Value which represents the total number of pulses accumulated during the Period The Factor parameter may be used to introduce a scaling factor For example if each pulse is 1 100th of gallon set the Factor to 01 and the Value will represent the total number of gallons totalized Rate represents the rate of change of the input The Rate is calculated using the IntPeriod the TimeUnits and the Mode If the Mode is 0 then the Rate is calculated by software using the RawValue and the Elapse parameter If the Mode is 1 then the Rate is calculated using the hardware registers in the Model 8204 and the real time clock The IntPeriod specifies how often the Rate calculation is performed The longer the IntPeriod the more accurate and stable the Rate will be The TimeUnits parameter allows the user to specify whether the Rate is per second minute hour or day When the Period expires the Value is shifted into PrevValue and Value is reset to 0 and totalization is re initiated Interfacing to Other Points Th
244. ns The Communications installation requires connection of the appropriate communication cable to one of six connectors The available options include the RS 232 and RS 485 communications COMI jumper block W6 COM2 jumper block W7 COMO 05 COMI RS 232 JO COM2 RS 232 07 COMI RS 485 08 Surge ground J9 COM RS 485 010 28 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit LXX amm Forel 220 OO hOg n LUNA Og t a 70 y g Assembly 012259 U Rev 140795 o TED 9 1 D S 3 O Q ju o9 E COM1 jumper block W6 B D E 0 jumper block W7 pof aam Ot 0 ill E 9 COM RS 485 J10 COMO J5 Surge ground J9 COM RS 232 J6 RS 485 J8 COM RS 232 J7 Figure 4 10 Communication Components of the 8130 RTU Motherboard COM and 2 jumper blocks W6 W7 W6 and W7 determine whether RS 232 or RS485 is used For RS 232 there are two different settings One setting is used if hardware hands
245. ns such as the Unit Temperature the Unit Current Field Power and the Intrusion alarm The DIAG point also provides the parameters list for the Front Panel Display when COM 0 is configured as the Local Diagnostic port 64 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Parameters The database parameters used by the DIAG point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Mode Determines how the Local Diagnostic Interface will operate Values are 1 Normal Mode Full Access 2 Update Mode 3 Tank Mode LevelUnits Units used on Local Display Unit E Englist ft in 16ths M Metric The default value is E PntRef1 Point References to database parameters that are displayed in update mode when the Local Diagnostic Display is connected to a COM port Up to 8 references may be used Refer to Chapter 6 for more information on the Local Diagnostic mode PntRef8 UpdateRate The UpdateRate parameter is used in conjunction with the PntRef1 PntRef8 parameters in the Local Diagnostic mode The default value is 10 seconds Dynamic Parameters Function Command Diagnostic command to issue to the 8130 RTU Value 0 to Value 3 Command data used with the Command parameter UnitTemp Floating point value of the built in temperature monitor presented in degrees F UnitCurrent Floating point value of the built in current monitor presented in mA Fiel
246. ns the default data The user enters these values Edit Point Window Buttons The user is able to perform a series of functions from selecting the buttons found in the bottom of the Edit Point window Each button is described in the table below Button Function Next The Next button allows the user to step through the list of points The user is able to view the Edit Point window of the following point number Selecting Next at the end of the point number list wraps to the beginning Previous The Previous button allows the user to step through multiple points of a point type The user is able to view the data in the Edit Point window of the previous point Selecting Previous at the first point number wraps to the last point number of the list Download The Download button allows the user to download the entire point data to the tank gauge Upload The Upload button allows the user to upload the entire point data to the tank gauge Varec Inc 143 Using Tank Gauge Configurator Button Function Examine The Examine button is used to open files that are either uploaded to the tank gauge or downloaded from the tank gauge Opening a Edit Point window Click on the Examine button Highlight the file parameter from the Edit Point window The system opens the Windows Notepad and displays the file Exit The Exit button exits the current point configuration and returns the user to the mai
247. nt O module causes the I O LED to toggle Error On if a non recoverable error has occurred Run Indicator The RUN Indicator provides the single most important feedback of proper system operation When the system functions properly the RUN Indicator is constantly flashing at a 1Hz rate If this indicator ever goes to a steady state condition either on or off some malfunction has occurred In addition relative processor loading can be determined by observing the RUN Indicator duty cycle Under normal conditions this indicator flashes once every second Varec Inc 163 Troubleshooting If the Run LED is flashing rapidly 10 Hz the 8130 RTU is in Boot mode indicating the 8130 RTU firmware is either corrupt or nonexistent Communications Indicator The Communications indicator provides communication line status When it is toggling the system is exchanging data As the system receives a valid message from the Host this indicator toggles If the indicator is idle the system is off line VO Indicator When this LED is toggling the system is exchanging data between the 8130 RTU and any intelligent I O module LED Displays Under Abnormal Conditions The table below lists the abnormal conditions of the four indicator lights From this table the user should be able to pinpoint the cause and derive a solution to the problem Run Communications Online Output Enabled Error Figure 11 2 8130 R
248. nt Types screen If you only have Level 1 LDI security the LDI prompts you to confirm the change Press Y to proceed or lt N gt to cancel the edit 5 Enter the point data Note Unlike ViewRTU the LDI does not automatically configure a new point with any default settings So after adding a point with the LDI be sure to enter all important point data with the Edit Point function Deleting a Point You can delete an existing point from the 8130 RTU database by using the Delete Point function To delete a point from the 8130 RTU database using the LDI Interface 156 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Delete a point from the 8130 RTU database 1 From the LDI main menu press D The Point type menu appears 2 Selectthe point type you want to delete by pressing its corresponding number and pressing ENTER The LDI prompts you for the point number to delete 3 DIAG 4 CLK 5 LO 6 DI Del Pnt Type 6 to del DI Figure 10 8 Delete Point Type 3 Enter the point number and press lt ENTER gt If you only have Level 1 LDI security the LDI prompts you to confirm the change Press lt Y gt to proceed or lt N gt to cancel the edit 4 The system deletes the point and displays Point Deleted If you entered an invalid entry or the point cannot be deleted the LDI displays an error message Press ENTER to return to the point type menu Editing a Point
249. nth scan of the REX the temperatures will be read BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 and 9600 The default is 4800 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the REX point on the Model 8212 and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the Model 8212 fails the 0x4000 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Functio
250. nts with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State responses being sent to the Host Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent although the value may have not changed since the last message The default is 60 Dynamic Parameters Function Value Output value for the SCALER point Value Ax By Cz x corresponds the RefValuel y is RefValue2 and z is RefValue3 RefValue1 RefValuel 3 are the values of the PntRefl 3 parameter references RefValue2 The references can be to any point that produces a floating point value RefValue3 Valuel Value parameter converted to Integer format Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time the SCALER point last executed PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The SCALER point allows the user to perform simple math functions such as conversion of unit
251. ny or all of these parameters or signals may be specified for use with the VALVE point If a signal or parameter is not present it can be set to Undefined and it will be ignored The VALVE point allows the user to enter an Open Close Reverse or Stop by changing the Command parameter Entering a Command of Open will cause valve to open Likewise a Command of Close will cause the valve to close The Command parameter causes an On or Off value to be written to the parameter specified by the OpenLink and ClosedLink parameters A Stop command will immediately stop the valve The valve will not change position until a new command is issued A Reverse command will reverse the last command In this case a CoastDown timer can be specified that will cause the VALVE point to wait before issuing the opposite command as the last operator command The user can specify a value for the TransTimeOut which will cause a Stop command to be issued if the valve is in the Opening or Closing state to long indicating a possible stuck valve In addition to Open amp Close commands the user can enter a SetPoint command which will cause the VALVE point to drive the outputs until the setpoint is achieved The PositionRef must be defined for this feature to function 92 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Interfacing to Other Points Either the OpenRef or ClosedRef must be entered If only one is specified then the valid states for the
252. o Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point 142 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Micropilot Interface RG7000 The RG7000 point provides an interface to the Micropilot FMR radar gauge This point provides level and interface information Other information such as point and gauge status is also available in this software block This point does not communicate directly to the FMR radar gauge All communication must be made via a Tank Side Monitor TM4590 Parameters The database parameters used by the RG7000 point are listed and described below Config Constant Parameters Function WMSeal Coded parameter value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Tank 22 The default tag is set to RG7000 00 Module The Module parameter determines where the RG7000 point will execute The RG7000 point can be used with a Model 8203 Valid values are 1 4 A value of 255 disables scanning Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For a Model 8203 Chan is either 1 or 2 ID The Device ID of the TM4590 connected to the RG7000 radar BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400
253. o communicate with the Saab DAU An DAU point is needed for each DAU connected to the 8130 RTU The ID must match the unit address of the Saab DAU Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The BaudRate and ComParams values must match the communications parameters of the Data Acquisition Unit The communications parameters are set as each DAU point is processed The DAU point works in conjunction with the Modbus Master protocol handler MSCAN points are automatically created and the user only has to set the Module Chan BaudRate ComParams and ID parameters in order to establish communications with the Saab DAU The Mode parameter determines whether the DAU point reads the data from the Saab FCU s holding registers If the Mode is 0x02 then the data is read from the holding registers The Addr parameter determines the FCU address and the ID is not used If the Mode is then the FCU sends the request to the DAU and sends the response back to the 8130 RTU The ID is used and the Addr parameter is ignored This mode is sometimes referred to as pass through mode 100 Installation and Operations Manual 8203 GSI Model 2000 Modbus Interface GSIMB Parameters The GSI Model 2000 Modbus GSIMB point provides an interface to GSI Modbus transmitters The point provides both level and temperature data Information such as point and gaugestatus is also available in this point block The database parameters used by the GSIMB
254. oint on the Model 8203 Model 8213 or Model 8217 and verifies it is scanning for gauges Dynamic Parameters Function AvgTemp IEEE Floating point value representing the average temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge The AvgTemp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point Vaportemp Floating point value representing the gas temperature The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge The Temperature can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter of the appropriate VISCAN or MSCAN point Temp1 Temp16 Floating point value representing the product temperature at various levels The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Temp1 Temp10 can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter of the WBSCAN AverageNum Number of active temperature elements Level Level Data from SG6000X ErrorCode Error Code Refer to the NMT manual for further explanation Status Hart Command 48 Status Refer to manufacturer for additional information DiagCode Diagnostic code CustodyMode Weights and Measures Status DeviceStatus 4590 TM4590 Internal Status Elapse Time of last scan Interval
255. ol Using the Modbus Protocol RG7000s are connected to a Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Module configured with Modbus firmware MODx_xx The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and a MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8203 will be used and to which channel on the 8203 the tank gauge is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the Tank Side Monitor TM4590 connected to the RG7000 Scanning begins when the Module is assigned Weights amp Measures Protection The RG7000 point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameters can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters when unlocked and will be greyed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal to Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point 144 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Saab Radar Tank Gauge RTG The Saab Radar Tank Gauge point provides an interface to Saab Radar Tank Gauges Td The RTG point interfaces to Saab 2920 2930 2940 2960 3920 3930 3940 and 3960 RTGs using Modbus The point executes the Model 8212 Saab TRL 2 Interface The RTG point can also be used with a Saab FCU The Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface MODx xx firmware can be used to read tank data from the Saab FCU Parameters The database parameters use
256. om this window the user is able to view and edit database parameters Several methods can be used to display this window depending on the user s current location in the program If in the Main window select Edit from the Point menu Select the desired point type and corresponding point number If in the main window double right click on the point icon If in the Point Connections window double left click on the focus point icon If in the Point Connections window double right click on a point icon other than the focus point icon The following example window appears C3 EDIT POINT Point Help Current Point D Point Desc 01 00 Digital Inputs Point Tag 1 Auto Description Point Description Channel Input Channel ChanQuan Channel Quantity 1 alue_0 Value for RawYalue 0 Off alue_1 Value for RawValue 1 On alue_2 Value for RawValue 2 Undefined alue_3 Value for RawValue 3 Undefined Reverse Reverse No Latch Latch No 1 Hand Off Auto Switch 1 Digital Input Value Undefined Raw Input Value 0 0000 Point Status 0 Sun Jan 04 16 03 02 2004 0 0000 Time of Last Update PntCheckSum Point CheckSum Minimize Next Examine Download Connections Previous Exit Upload Figure 8 23 Edit Digital Point Dialog Edit Digital Point Dialog This window is used to view and modify the Dynamic and Configuration parameters of the selected po
257. on and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit COM Port Protocol Baud Rate Data Bits Parity Stop Bits COMO 8130 RTU Slave 9600 8 N 1 COMI 8130 RTU Slave 19200 8 N 1 COM3 8130 RTU Slave 19200 8 N 1 4 8130 RTU Slave 24000 8 N 1 Scanning Task The 1 0 Scanning and Control Task are dedicated to the scanning of field input data from analog digital and pulse sources Type of Data Source I O Expansion Module Analog data Models 8204 and 8205 Digital data Model 8201 and 8204 Pulse data Model 8204 The input data is stored in arrays that are subsequently accessed by the Point Executive Point Executive The Point Executive handles processing of the built in 8130 RTU software blocks that are configured by the user There are two levels of points as listed below Low Level Point processing task e g Analog Digital Input and Output processing High Level Point processing task e g Totalizers Alarms etc Each level executes independently of the other level These tasks perform filtering timed hold off determination and conversion of the data before it is permanently stored in the database When it has been determined that a change of state has occurred other tasks within the system are notified of the change Output processing involves receiving notifications of change from the Remote Communications tasks or Local Interface Once received the desired output
258. on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8203 or 8213 has stopped updating 0x8000 No Response first pass 8211 Only 0x0000 No Error 0x0010 Device Not Responding 0x0020 CRC Error 0x0040 Invalid Command 0x0080 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Motherboard determines that the Model 8211 has stopped updating PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMChecksum Weights amp Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMSeal parameter is set to Enable Application The Varec Tank Side Monitor can operate with a variety of protocols including L amp Tankway Modbus V1 Mark Space or Whessoe Bus However the TM4590 point is only used when communicating via V1 Modbus or Whessoe Bus When using L amp J Tankway an LJ1000 LJ1500 or LJ2000 point is used to communicate to the TM4590 When using Mark Space an MSTX point is used For more information on these other communications protocols please consult the Varec 8210 or 8215 manuals V1 Protocol Using V1 Protocol TM4590s are connected to a Model 8213 V1 Interface Module The Model 8213 is automatically detected at startup and a VISCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8213 will be used and to which channel on the 8213 TM4590 is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the TM4590 Modbus Protocol Using Modbus P
259. onfiguration Parameters Function RTUTag 8130 RTUTag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character DBFile The database file name DBFile is the name of the RCF database configuration file DBVer The database version AutoDetect Enable Disable auto detection of I O modules installed on the 8130 RTU Default is Disable PntEnable Disable Enable execution of points Default is Enable AlgEnable Disable Enable execution of algorithms Default is Enable OutputEnable Disable Enable Outputs Default is Enable AlScanEnable Disable Enable Analog Input scanning Default is Enable DIScanEnable Disable Enable Digital Input scanning Default is Enable Override Communication failure override Default is Enable Dynamic Parameters Function UnitAddr The 8130 RTU Unit Address SW1 DBPnts The number of database points defined DBSize The size of the database in bytes DBChanging The initial time of database modification DBChanged The completion time of database modification DBChangeTime The time of last database modification SysVer The Firmware version SysCheckSum The System Checksum HardVer The PCB hardware version PSDVer The programmable logic version HART HART Modem circuit is present NumResets Records the number of resets that have occurred RAMSize Size of installed system scratch memor
260. onfiguration change 4 Configuration checksum error Elapse Time of the last Change of State PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters 66 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Application The DO point provides an interface to the Model 8201 16 Channel Digital Input Output Module and the Model 8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module The DO point executes by exception In this mode an output is driven whenever another point or when the user issues a command In some cases the user may want the output to de activate if the 8130 RTU goes offline The Communications Watchdog point WDOG can be configured to notify DO points to revert to a default value when the 8130 RTU goes offline The CommFailValue sets the value to set the Value parameter to when the 8130 RTU goes offline This feature is activated by the WDOG point If no WDOG point exists then the output will not be changed by an offline condition the default mode Interfacing to Other Points The DO point is often used as the destination a Link for other point application programs The Pump Control PUMP Valve Control VALVE and Digital Alarm DAL points are examples of points that send commands to the DO point Double Word Register DREG The Double Word Register point provides four bytes of storage It is often used for inter 1 point communications where other means is provided Parameters T
261. or scaling the output to an integer value when DataMode 0 ValueMax Output range Scale used for scaling the output to an integer value when DataMode 0 CommfailValue Value to set all of the output registers to when there is a communications or other failure The CommFailValue works in conjunction with the Filter values If the PntStatus of the PntRef has bits set that match the Filter the reference value is declared invalid and the output value will be set to the CommFailValue This mode is overridden by DataMode 0x02 Addr Addr1 is the Data Address and PntRef1 is the corresponding database PntRefl parameter that will be used for a response The default Size is 1 See the Sizel discussion below for more detail on the Size parameter Filter The Filter is used to determine if the data is valid The PntStatus of the Mer point specified by the PntRef is read and if there are bits set that match Addr10 the Filter the source data is considered invalid The output registers will PntRef10 be set to the value determined by the CommFailValue SizelO Filter10 Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Value 0 No error PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum of point s static Configuration Parameters Application The GWBLK point is a look up table used by the Modbus Slave protocol handler Up to sixteen address point reference pairs may be used per GWBLK point Multiple GWBLK points may be
262. ored The default tag is set to MBTX 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of will use the 8130 RTU Motherboard A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the MSTX is connected to On the Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 2400 and 9600 The BaudRate is set prior to scanning the device The default is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 80 Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Mode Operational Mode Valid values are 0x01 Swap Mode Swap integers The default is 0x00 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data read from the MBTX F Feet M Meters The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup Default is F LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F Feet M Meters Default is F Varec Inc 109 Configuration Parameters Function TempUnits Specifies the engineering units for th
263. ormally you should set the ValueMax to the same value as the Scale Threshold The Theshold can be used to force the Value to the ValueMin First the Value is calculated using the Offset and Scale parameters Then the ValueMin and ValueMax are applied If the Value is less than the Threshold then the Value is set to the ValueMin Deadband Change of State Deadband When the Value changes by the amount specified by the Deadband a Change of State will occur and the data will be transmitted to the Host The Default is 2 Filter Input Filter Constant Specifies the number of samples to use in the Rate calculation Valid values are 1 10 The default is 1 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 240 Varec Inc 49 8130 R
264. parate file the current file is automatically closed Only one file may be open at a time Varec Inc 133 Using Tank Gauge Configurator Exit The Exit option is used to close the ViewRTU application If the current configuration file has not been saved the user is prompted to save the file or cancel the option The Point Menu C3 ViewRTU Test TCF Fie Point Config Communications Options Help Add Ctrl A Edit Ctrl4E Figure 9 3 Point Menu Edit The user is able to edit an existing point by clicking on the Edit button from the toolbar or by selecting Edit Point from the Point menu This option is used to modify the contents of a selected point When selected the following dialog box appears SELECT POINT TO EDIT Point UNIT E Point Num 0 UNIT 0O UNIT Caneel Figure 9 4 Edit Point Selection Dialog This dialog box displays a list of defined point types and corresponding point numbers The point icon is also displayed for identification as well as the tag if a tag has been assigned Once a point is selected the Edit Point dialog box appears 134 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit CicNFeURETAKGAUGE E Current Point p Point Desc UNIT 00 Barton 3500 Unit Config TANK GAUGE CONFIGURATION DATA MessageNum Message ID UnitNum Unit Number UnitLabel Unit Label TankTyp
265. peration Set the TripHigh or TripLow parameter values to specify the valid operating range To check proper operation after a pump start a FlowRef may be defined which will check for valid flow after a delay period specified by FlowDelay The FlowRef may be either a DI point or an AISTAT point in the case of time varying signals The FlowValue needs to be Normal in order for the pump to continue to operate If using a DI point set the Value O and Value parameters to Normal and Alarm respectively If an analog or pulse signal is used to measure flow then use an interposing AISTAT point Set the TripHigh or TripLow parameter values to specify the valid operating range A general purpose AlarmRef parameter is also included which allows for an additional shutdown condition The AlarmRef may be a DI or DAL point or an AAL or AISTAT point in the case of time varying signals The FlowValue needs to be Normal in order for the pump to continue to operate If using a DI point set the Value O and Value 1 parameters to Normal and Alarm respectively If an analog or pulse signal is used to measure flow then use an interposing AISTAT point Set the TripHigh or TripLow parameter values to specify the valid operating range The suction or discharge pressure may also be checked The PressRef may be defined which will check for valid pressure after a delay period specified by PressDelay The PressRef may be either a DI point or an AISTAT point in
266. peration of Host and Slave communications The Baud Rate Communications Parameters and Protocol may be changed by assigning values to the appropriate parameter Each Com port is independent of the other and completely flexible in its use For example the user may configure the system to communicate with a single host redundantly using the same protocol Alternatively the 8130 can communicate to different hosts using different protocols allowing the 8130 RTU to act as a bridge Other options include assigning one COM point to communicate with a Slave device while communicating to a Host system on the other Varec Inc 59 8130 RTU Software Blocks Interfacing to Other Points The COM point can be used in conjunction with a Communications Watchdog Point WDOG to provide for shutdown of the Digital and Analog Outputs when a communications failure occurs Coded Register CREG The Coded Register point provides two bytes of storage in the 8130 RTU Coded format H Li H H H H It is often used for inter point communications where no other means is provided Parameters The database parameters used by the CREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Function Value Coded Value Format 2 bytes Digital Alarm DAL The Digital Alarm Point monitors a coded value from a DI ALSEL or other point and m activates an output if an alarm condition is detected Parameters The dat
267. pherals Program memory is stored in flash memory that allows field upgrades of firmware through the communications channels The database is stored in up to 64K of nonvolatile RAM Scratch data tables and stacks are stored in RAM Software Description The 8130 RTU software platform is based on a real time multi tasking operating system The software consists of I O scanning functions for data acquisition a database database manager and communication functions for data transfer The software incorporates a variety of protocols allowing the 8130 RTU to interface as a master or slave device 8 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Low Level l O Scan Task Scan Tables Point Executive System Tasks Database in NOVRAM COM 0 COM 1 COM 2 COM 3 TASK TASK TASK TASK RS 232 RS 232 or or RS 485 RS 485 Figure 2 3 Software Block Diagram Software Features Real Time Multitasking Executive The operation of the 8130 RTU is based on a highly reliable field proven real time multi tasking executive It provides task switching based on real time events and interrupts message passing and task priorities Its capabilities also include timed suspension of tasks queue handlers and interrupt processing tasks Real Time Clock Integral to the real time executive is the system s real time clock All timed events of the 8130 RTU are coordinated by this clock In addition to the real time execu
268. point are listed and described below Config Constant Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to 00 ID Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For an 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Chan is either 1 or 2 BaudRate 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Valid values are 2400 4800 and 9600 The default is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the com port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 70 7 data bits Odd parity7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N LevelDeadband The LevelDeadband sets the deadband for the Change of State mode The default is 0 LevelOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Level The default is O TempMode F Fahrenheit C Celcius TempDeadband The TempDeadband is used to set the Change Of State deadband for temperature The default is 25 degrees TempOffset Specifies the amount of offset to add to the Temp The default is O Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Level Temp Position changes P
269. point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Protocol Protocol handler assigned to the ComPort Valid values are Disabled 8130 RTU Slave 8130 RTU Master Modbus Slave Modbus Master HART Master Enraf Master CIU TSU Slave Local Diag Printer RTU Slave RTU Master Enraf Master HART Master MODBUS Master MODBUS Slave Local Diag Disabled Generic Gauge VR Master The defaults are COM 0 8130 RTU Slave 9600 Baud COM 1 8130 RTU Slave 19200 Baud 2 8130 RTU Slave 19200 Baud COM 3 8130 Master Mode The Mode parameter is used in conjunction with the Protocol Different protocols will use the Mode in different ways depending on the needs of the protocol ComPort Communications Port number Valid values are 0 3 The ComPort parameter should never be modified by the user 58 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to either the Host or Slave system Valid values are 1200 2400 2400 9600 19200 24000 Changing the BaudRate parameter will immediately change the configuration of the ComPort The default value is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the Examples include 80 8 Data Bits Odd Parity 8E 8 Data Bits Even Parity 8N 8 Data Bits No Parity 70 7 Dat
270. presenting the alarm condition Value can be either Alarm or Normal RefValuel 16 Coded value indicating the status of the first input point reference to ALSEL point to monitor AlarmStatus Indicates alarm conditions for each of the RefValuel 16 parameters If RefValue is not Normal its corresponding bit is set OutputEnable Indicates whether the output is armed or not When a Reset command is given the OutputEnable bits are cleared thus disabling the alarm 54 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0 No error 15 Invalid Type for PntRef 16 Invalid Number for PntRef 17 Invalid Param for PntRef 19 PntRef point does not exist 25 PntRef is not defined Elapse Time of each update PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The ALSEL point executes continuously monitoring the status of the input references This point sets the value of the function output when at least one of the input references matches the Mode Each of the modes is explained in the table below Mode Description Alarm Any PntRef1 16 value other than Normal will result in Value Alarm Low Any PntRef1 16 value equal to Low or LowLow gt Value Alarm LoLo Any PntRef1 16 value equal to LowLow gt Value A
271. r of a COM point is set to Modbus Master the MFPREG point is used to read Floating Point values The MFPREG point executes on either the 8130 Motherboard or on the Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface module MODx xx firmware Parameters The database parameters used by the MFPREG point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Modbus Slave or Register Value The default tag is set to MFPREG 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of 0 will use the 8130 RTU Motherboard A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the slave device is connected to On the Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the Chan can be set to 0 1 or 2 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 2400 9600 and 19200 The BaudRate is set prior to scanning the device ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N ID Slave Address of the device to be scanned
272. rage It is often used for inter point s communications where no other means is provided Parameters The database parameters used by the IREG point are listed and described below Dynamic Parameters Functions Value Integer 2 bytes value Modbus Gateway MODGW The Modbus Gateway provides dynamic and statistical information for the olod communications between the 8130 RTU and the Modbus masters Parameters The database parameters used by the MODGW point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function ID Slave Address that the Modbus Slave protocol handler will respond to The default is to match the Unit Address of the 8130 RTU Mode Operational Mode The Mode is a hex value with individual bits controlling various aspects of the operation of the Modbus Slave protocol handler The bits have the following meanings 0x01 Set Param Indexing mode 0x02 Integer Swap mode 0x04 Swap CRC bytes 0x20 Wonderware Mode 0x80 Ignore any trailing nulls in the request The default is O BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Host system Valid values are 1200 2400 4800 9600 and 19200 Changing the BaudRate parameter will immediately change the configuration of the ComPort The default is 19200 Varec Inc 73 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the
273. re Blocks These software blocks program the 8130 RTU to perform various tasks such as scaling an analog input value or scanning level temperature and status information from a tank gauge More than 75 functions are available Points are the individual instances of software blocks At the 1 0 level a Point is needed to manage the operation of each input output or communications channel 1 can be Simple or Intelligent Digital Input DI and Analog Input Al points are examples of Simple 1 0 Intelligent 1 O always involves digital communications with an external micro processor based system Intelligent I O uses a COM point and a protocol handler in order to communicate with the external system Examples include Varec 1900 MSTX and Whessoe Varec Intelligent Tank Gauge ITG points In both cases the user configures the Config parameters and is provided real time data through the Dynamic parameters Points can be interconnected in order to perform complex functions For example a PUMP point interfaces to multiple input and output sources DI Al or DO points in order to monitor and control a pump The PUMP point can also interface to an Event Timer TIMER point which can then be used to totalize the pump runtime Many point descriptions contain an Interfacing to Other Points section that describes how to make these connections The Series 8130 contains over 75 built in software functions depending on the I O expansion modules inst
274. rmware can be used to read tank data from the Saab FCU Parameters The database parameters used by the REX point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify the name of the tank being monitored The default tag is set to REX 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to REX 00 WMSeal Coded value that enables Weights amp Measures password protection Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8212 or Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the REX is connected to On the Model 8212 or Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 ID Physical Address of the tank gauge transmitter 0 999 Addr FCU Address if Mode 0x02 LevelUnits Specifies the engineering units for the level data F feet m Millimeters s sixteenths of inches The LevelUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Level can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the LevelConvert parameter LevelConvert F feet
275. rotocol TM4590s are connected to a Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Module configured with Modbus firmware MODx xx The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and a MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8203 will be used and to which channel on the 8203 TM4590 is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the TM4590 Whessoe Bus Protocol Using Whessoe Bus Protocol TM4590s are connected to a Model 8211 Current Loop Module configured with Whessoe Bus firmware WBx xx The Model 8211 is automatically detected at startup and a WBSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8211 will be used and to which channel on the 8211 the TM4590 is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the TM4590 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit General All three interface methods provide a software interface to the Varec TM4590 Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The LevelUnits and TempUnits must match the engineering units of the gauge Conversion from Metric to English or vice versa can be performed by setting the LevelConvert and the TempConvert parameters in the VISCAN or WBSCAN point associated with the TM4590 point Weights amp Measures Protection The TM4590 point can be sealed when used in a Weights amp Measures application Only certain parameter
276. rresponding Point Connections window if applicable Note Double right clicking the input source or the output destination icon allows the user to view the point s Edit Point window 130 Installation and Operations Manual 9 Using Tank Gauge Configurator This chapter describes how to configure tank gauges using the Tank Gauge Configurator This chapter describes each of the menu items and gives user applications The Tank Gauge Configurator runs as a subsystem of ViewRTU You can use the Tank Gauge Configurator to configure and control tank settings from a workstation Like ViewRTU the Tank Gauge Configurator follows Windows standards so the user that is familiar with Windows will be able to learn the program quickly ViewRTU supports the Windows standard of selecting commands from a series of pull down menus If the user is not familiar with Windows based programs refer to the Microsoft Windows manual for basic instruction Executing the Tank Gauge Configurator This section describes how to start up the Tank Gauge Configurator from the ViewRTU program The components of the window are also described in this section To execute the Tank Gauge Configurator program follow the steps below Execute the Tank Gauge Configurator program If needed double click on the ViewRTU icon to execute ViewRTU If more than one 8130 RTU definition file DVR exists the system prompts you to select which file to use See the Using ViewRTU sect
277. rt Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 120 Watchdog Enables the Motherboard watchdog task for the MG5000 point The watchdog task monitors the MG5000 point and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the MG5000 point stops execution the PntStatus will be set to 0x4000 to indicate a failure Dynamic Parameters Function TestCmd MG5000 test commands Valid commands are 0x02 Change gauge address 0x41 RAM Read Write Test 0x42 ROM data checksum test 0x44 EEPROM Data Checksum Test 0x45 Counter Integrity Test 0x46 Analog Converter Test 0x47 Communication Hardware Test 0x48 Waveguide Driver Amplifier Co
278. s The SCALER point takes the value from user specified database references multiplies each by a constant and adds the three product terms A constant K may also be factored in The SCALER point works in conjunction with parameters that are in floating point format Interfacing to Other Points The SCALER point is often used as the input source a Reference for other point application programs The Tank TANK Modbus Floating Point Register MFPREG and Modbus Integer Register MIREG points are examples of points that can use the SCALER point data to calculate other data values Signal Selector SIGSEL The Signal Selector Point monitors multiple floating point values from Al or other points E and calculates the Minimum Maximum or Average value Parameters The database parameters used by the SIGSEL point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to SIGSEL 0O Mode Operational mode for the SIGSEL Valid choices are Minimum Maximum and Average The default value is Average ValueMin Minimum Reference Value If the value is less than the ValueMin it will be ignored The default value is 100 ValueMax Maximum Reference Value If the value is more than the ValueMa
279. s Function PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMChecksum Weights amp Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMSeal parameter is set to Enable Application The SG6000 point can operate using multiple protocols V1 Protocol Using V1 Protocol Servo tank gauges are connected to a Model 8213 V1 Interface Module The Model 8213 is automatically detected at startup and a VISCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan parameters determine which Model 8213 will be used and to which channel on the 8213 the tank gauge is connected The ID must match the Device ID of the SG6000 General Both interface methods provide a software interface to the Varec SG6000 Scanning begins when the Module is assigned The LevelUnits and TempUnits must match the engineering units of the gauge Conversion from Metric to English or vice versa can be performed by setting the LevelConvert and the TempConvert parameters in the VISCAN or MSCAN point associated with the SG6000 point Commands can be issued to the gauge by setting the Command parameter The user may raise or lower the servo or read write information from the gauge s internal data matrix Gauge Commands The SG6000 point provides access to the Servo s gauge commands allowing configuration of gauge parameters and control of the servo motor and displacer Configuration of the SG6000 Servo
280. s Integer value indicating status of the gauge Integer Register 6 Values are 0x0001 Hart Input 1 error 0x0002 Hart Input 2 error 0x0004 Hart Input 3 error 0x0008 Not Used 0x0010 Analog Input 1 Error 0x0020 Analog Input 2 Error 0x0040 Analog Input 2 Error 0x0080 RTG Communications Failure 0x0100 LPG verify copy 0x0200 Not Used 0x0400 Not Used 0x0800 Presentation level M I P level 0x1000 NMI approved RTG 0x2000 NMI legal level inverted Not NMI 0 0x4000 Master FCU set to 1 if REX does not answer 0x8000 Valid level Rate Level Rate TankLevel Value read from gauge Ullage Ullage Analog through Analog2 Analog Currents 1 and 2 Temp through Temp14 Floating point value representing the product temperature at various levels The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Templ Temp14 can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter TempFilter 16 Bit Status Code that determines if a temperature element is in liquid Register 19 For example Bit 1 means Temp 1 is in liquid For further explanation see the REX documentation TempStatus 16 Bit Code that determines the Blocked status of the temperature elements Register 1A For example Bit 1 means Temp 1 is Blocked For further explanation see the REX documentation TempDiagCode 16 Bit Error Code that determines the stat
281. s can be sealed These parameters will be shown in blue CONSTANT parameters when unlocked and will be greyed out when locked To seal the point set the WMSeal to Enable Note that FuelsManager must be active in order to seal or unseal a point Varec Inc Installation and Operations Manual 8203 76 76 OX 76 The X76CTM point provides an interface to the Ronan X76CTM tank monitoring system This point provides both level and temperature data Information such as volume leak rate point and gauge status is also available in this point block Parameters The database parameters used by the X76CTM point are listed and described below Config Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Tank 22 The default tag is set to X76CTM 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to X76CTM 00 Module Valid values 1 4 Default value is 255 Chan Communications channel to which the gauge is connected For an 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Chan is either 1 or 2 BaudRa
282. s or effect control The Value and the RawValue are the parameters calculated by the AI point which can be used as input in other points 50 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Analog Functions AIFUNC HII The Analog Function Point monitors a floating point value from an AI or any other point Parameters ST type that produces a floating point value and calculates a rate of change Additionally the AIFUNC point records the daily high and low values as well as the time of high and low occurrence The database parameters used by the AIFUNC point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to AIFUNC 00 PntRef Input point reference for the AIFUNC point to monitor The AIFUNC point interfaces to floating point data values W0 W3 Weight values to factor into the last four samples Deadband Change of State Deadband When the Value changes by the amount specified by the Deadband a Change of State will occur and the data will be transmitted to the Host The default value is 0 1 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can
283. s the user to enter or select a value for a parameter 1 Click on the desired cell or column 2 Select Set Value from the Edit menu The Modify Value dialog box appears Varec Inc 125 Using ViewRTU MODIFY VALUE Command Gauge Command Find Wtr Lvl Find Wtr Lvl ia Follow Level Follow Wtr Lvl Raise Beset Download Store Cancel Figure 8 36 Spreadsheet Mode Editing Point Parameter Values 3 Enter or select a value from the scroll list Set Value with Auto Increment This option can also be used for numeric parameters such as channels to auto increment the value Follow the procedure below 1 Click each desired cell or column 2 Select Set Value from the Edit menu The following dialog box appears SPREADSHEET MODE Point Edit Options of ul Protocol s Local Diag Independent Undefined MODIFY VALUE t3 Undefined D Uf 3 HART Master Undefined h Store Cancel v il Figure 8 37 Spreadsheet Mode Editing Point Parameter Values using Auto Increment Each value in the column is incremented by one for the range of rows selected All cells that are selected and match the data type of the value are set to the value 126 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit The Options Menu CT SPREADSHEET MODE B
284. scribed below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Modbus Slave or Register Value The default tag is set to GWBLK 00 Protocol Protocol that the GWBLK point is used with Valid values are Modbus Slave If not set the 8130 RTU assumes the protocol is Modbus ComPort Bit mask to enable address referencing If a bit corresponding to the then address referencing is enabled for the channel The default is OxFF all COM ports DataMode Integer HEX value that controls the data returned to a Modbus Host 0 Use parameter values 0x01 Convert to Integer 0x02 Return OxFF if the data is invalid 0x04 Convert to Integer using only the Scale If the DataMode is 0x01 the PntRef data will be converted to an integer using the Offset Scale ValueMin and ValueMax If the DataMode is 0x04 the Scale parameter is used to convert to an integer It is possible to set multiple bits RegSet Register set size 70 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Configuration Parameters Function Offset Input range Offset used for scaling the output to an integer value when DataMode 0 Scale Input range Scale used for scaling the output to an integer value When DataMode 0 ValueMin Output range Offset used f
285. seLink The output link for Close commands Normally a DO point is specified Reverse Reverses the operation of the valve An Open command will close the valve and a Close command with open the valve This parameter can be set to Yes or No The default value is No Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 120 Dynamic Parameters Function Command Valve Command Valid values are Open Close Stop and Reverse SetPoint If the PositionRef is defined then the user can enter a position setpoint and the VALVE point will drive the valve to the SetPoint LastCommand Last command issued CommandTime Time of last command Varec Inc 91 8130 RTU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function Value Valve status This p
286. signation Ordering Structure 8130 RTU NEMA 4 Enclosure for use in Class Div 2 areas Enclosure Type 140061213 20x24x8 in with 48VDC supply 140061562 24x20x8 in 140061564 24x24x6 in with 24VDC supply and Modem 140061566 24x20x8 in with Front Panel Display no Power Supply Ordering Structure Miscellaneous Options Modem Only specify type 280061489 Front Panel Display Ordering Structure I O Module Options 450061357 DC Output Module 3 60 VDC Normally Open 450061358 AC Input Module 0 140VAC 8mA 450061368 AC Output Module 24 140VAC Normally Open Varec Inc 169 Order Codes 450061369 450061387 450061388 450061389 450061390 450061621 450061582 450061491 450061574 450061623 DC Input Module 3 32 VDC 18mA AC Input Module 90 140 VAC AC Output Module 12 140 VAC Normally Open DC Input Module 10 32 VDC DC Output Module 5 60 VDC Normally Open AC Input Module 240 VAC AC Output Module 240 VAC Normally Open Analog Input Module 4 20mA use with 8204 only 22 G4ODC5R5 Normally Closed High Speed Pulse Input Module 1 5VDC Ordering Structure Expansion Modules Module Slots N8201 16 Channel Digital In Out 2 N8203 Dual RS 485 Communication Interface Option 2 Modbus protocol 1 Option 3 protocol 1 Option 4 Petrosense Probe protocol 1 N8204 8 Channel Multi Function Module 1
287. sired parameter to enter a new value The following example Modify Point dialog box appears Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit MODIFY VALUE Command Gauge Command Find Wtr Lvl Find Wtr Lvl Follow Level Follow Wtr Lvl Raise Reset Download Store Cancel Figure 8 26 Edit Point Parameter Value Dialog Edit Point Parameter Value Dialog From this dialog box the user is able to enter a value for the selected parameter The dialog box varies according to the selected parameter In some dialog boxes the user is able to enter the name or data directly in the edit box Other dialogs contain a scroll list from which the user selects a value The new value can then be downloaded to the 8130 RTU or stored locally if the 8130 RTU is offline Modifying a Reference There are two ways to modify a reference One method is performed from the Edit Point window and the other method is performed from the Point Connections window For convenience both methods are listed below To modify a Reference 1 Inthe Edit Point Window double click the desired reference parameter to enter a new value The following dialog box appears 2 Inthe Point Connections Window drag and drop the point icon onto the PntRef The follow ing dialog box appears MODIFY REFERENCE X OpenedRef Opened Limit Switch Reference DI xl 00 VCP1 HOA Auto gt Va
288. sk monitors the MBMFT point on the Model 8203 and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the Model 8203 fails the 0x0010 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Function Command The Command parameter allows you to issue a single command to the gauge Valid commands include Cancel Clear Mods Restart Save to EEPROM Calibrate Enc Battery Off LevelRef Calibration Level The LevelRef provides a means to calibrate the level in the tank gauge transmitter Set the LevelRef and then issue a Calibrate command Mass Floating point value representing the Effective Mass 32 bit Register 0025 NetMass Floating point value representing the True Mass 32 bit Register 0026 Density Floating point value representing the Density 32 bit Register 0027 CorrDensity Floating point value representing the Standard Density 32 bit Register 0028 Reserved Reserved Level Floating point value representing the Tank Level 32 bit Register 0030 WaterLevel Floating point value representing the Water Level 32 bit Register 0031 GrossVolume Floating point value representing the Product Volume 32 bit Register 0032 NetVolume Floating point value representing the Standard Product Volume 32 bit Register 0033 WaterVolume Floating point value representing the Water Volume 32 bit Register 0034 Ullage Floating point value representing the
289. solely intended to describe product installation and functions and should not be used for any other purpose It is subject to change without prior notice This manual was prepared with the highest degree of care However should you find any errors or have any questions contact one of our service offices or your local sales agent Installation and Operations Manual 8203 Safety Precaution Definitions Caution Damage to equipment may result if this precaution is disregarded Warning Direct injury to personnel or damage to equipment which can cause injury to personnel may result if this precaution is not followed Safety Precautions Read this manual carefully and make sure you understand its contents before using this product Follow all instructions and safety guidelines presented in this manual when using this product If the user does not follow these instructions properly Varec cannot guarantee the safety of the system Note Comply with all applicable regulations codes and standards For safety precautions the user should refer to the appropriate industry or military standards Caution Electrical Hazard Read and understand static and lightning electrical protection and grounding described in API 2003 Make certain that the installation operation and maintenance conforms with the practice set forth therein Warning Striking the product with a metal object could cause a spark to occur When removing or replacing the pro
290. ster Valuel The default tag is set to MIREG 00 Module Physical address 1 4 of the Model 8203 used to interface to the slave device A value of will use the 8130 RTU Motherboard A value of 255 is undefined Chan Physical channel number the slave device is connected to On the Model 8203 the Chan can be set to 1 or 2 On the 8130 RTU Motherboard the Chan can be set to 0 1 or 2 BaudRate Baud Rate for communications to the Slave device Valid values are 1200 2400 2400 9600 and 19200 The BaudRate is set prior to scanning the device ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the COM port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8b 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity 7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N ID Slave Address of the device to be scanned Mode HEX byte value for the Operational Mode 0x01 Swap mode ReadCmd Command to use to Read data from the slave device WriteCmd Command to use to Write data to the slave device Addr Sizel Addr2 Size2 Addr3 Size3 Addr4 Size4 Data Address and Block Size pairs The MIREG point will read data from the slave device starting at Addrl and request Sizel registers Up to four blocks may be defined If the Size is zero then no read operation is performed The data is returned to the Value array Report Causes
291. t Interfacing to Other Points The AIFUNC point can be used in conjunction with almost any point that produces a floating point data value Typical examples are the Analog Input Al and Tank TANK The Rate of Change value can be used as input into an Analog Alarm point AAL This point provides a means to predict when tank fill or refill operation will be complete The daily high and low values are available for historical information Analog Status AISTAT e Analog Status Point monitors a floating point value from an AI or any other point The Analog S Poi i floating poi lue f Al h i type that produces a floating point value and calculates a coded value indicating a digital status such as High Low or Normal Parameters The database parameters used by the AISTAT point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as High Temp Alarm or Hi Level Alarm The default tag is set to AISTAT 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to AISTAT 00O PntRef Input point reference for the AISTAT point
292. t o c 1 Files of type Strap Table Files tst Y Cancel Figure 8 29 Open Dialog 2 Select or enter the file name and click OK The system returns you to the Edit Strap Table dialog displaying the imported information Export The Export icon allows the user export the strap table from the Edit Strap Table dialog to a file To export the strap table 1 Click Export The Save As dialog appears Open ewes Look in C ViewRTU emer Eems File name forts Files of type Strap Table Files 19 Figure 8 30 Save As Dialog Varec Inc 121 Using ViewRTU 2 Enter a file name and click OK The file name must have a TST or CSV extension so you can import the file at another time The system saves the file and returns you to the Edit Strap Table dialog Check The Check icon allows the user confirm that the strap table has a valid data format If the strap table is in the correct format it displays the following check dialog If a problem exists in the strap table format it displays the following check dialog and takes you to the entry that has the problem Configuring Multiple Points The spreadsheet mode is one of the methods used to configure points This method is the most beneficial when editing and viewing multiple points of the same type Spreadsheets of each defined point are found in the Spreadsheet Summary section in the main window
293. t Floating point value representing the 4 20 mA Current 32 bit Register 0051 AlarmStatus Integer value indicating the Alarm Status Integer Register 76 Values are 0x0001 Critical Low Level 0x0002 Advisory Low Level 0x0004 Advisory High Level 0x0008 Critical High Level 0x0010 Unauthorized Mass Movement 0x0020 Standard Density Alarm 0x0040 Critical Zone Alarm 0x0080 Critical Low Temperature 0x0100 Critical High Temperature 0x0200 Hardware Alarm Input 1 0x0400 Hardware Alarm Input 2 0x0800 Reserved 0x1000 Reserved 0x2000 Reserved 0x4000 Advisory Low Temperature 0x8000 Advisory High Temperature AlarmO Reserved Integer Register 77 Alarm Reserved Integer Register 78 Varec Inc 105 Dynamic Parameters Function StatusFlag Integer value indicating the System Diagnostics Integer Register 79 Values are 0x0001 Top Transmitter Failure 0x0002 Top Transmitter Communication Failure 0x0004 Middle Transmitter Failure 0x0008 Middle Transmitter Communication Failure 0x0010 Bottom Transmitter Failure 0x0020 Bottom Transmitter Communication Failure 0x0040 Bad Product Temperature 0x0080 RTD Resistance out of range 0x0100 Bad Level 0x0200 HART Encoder Communication Failure 0x0400 Pb lt Pm 0x0800 Pb lt Pt 0x1000 Pm lt Pt 0x2000 Pb uncovered 0x4000 Pm uncovered 0x8000 Reserved GaugeStatus Integer value indicating th
294. t mouse button on one or more parameters 2 Click on the Minimize icon A following example window appears C VIEW POINT DATA 01 00 Jog alue Digital Input Yalue Off HawValue Raw Input Value 0x0000 IPntStatus Point Status 0 Figure 8 24 Edit Point Dialog Minimized Note Parameters can be edited in the minimized mode by double clicking the right mouse button on the desired selection To maximize the window click on the maximize icon or click on the Application 2 Control menu of the window and select the Maximize menu option Connections The Connections icon allows the user to switch back to the Point Connections dialog box Next The Next icon allows the user to step through the list of points The user is able to view the Edit Point window of the following point number Selecting Next at the end of the point number list wraps to the beginning Previous The Previous icon allows the user to step through multiple points of a point type The user is able to view the data in the Edit Point window of the previous point Selecting Previous at the first point number wraps to the last point number of the list Varec Inc Using ViewRTU Examine The Examine icon is used to go to the Point Connections window of the reference point in the list box Opening a point connection window 1 Highlight the desired reference data parameter from the Edit Point window 2 Click the Examine button The user is taken
295. tabase parameters used by the WDOG point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Comm Watchdog The default tag is set to WDOG 00 Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to WDOG 00 Mode Operating Mode If Mode 1 then all of the RefValues defined must be Offline in order for Comm Fail processing to take place Use this in the case of redundant comm links to the host If Mode 2 then any of the RefValues defined can be Offline in order for Comm Fail processing to occur TimeOut Amount of time that the Offline condition exists before the notifications to turn off outputs are sent The default is 30 seconds PntRef1 PntRef4 The PntRef parameters determine the input source for the WDOG point to monitor Up to four references may be specified The Mode parameter determines how the WDOG point responds The PntRef must be to a point that produces a coded value The typical reference is to COM xx CommStatus Other point types may be used with the main criteria since the value Offline is state def
296. tables Level Units The user can convert the level units of the strap table by selecting one of the options in the Level Units list The system asks you to confirm your selection Volume Units The user can convert the volume units of the strap table by selecting one of the options in the Volume Units list The system asks you to confirm your selection Add Replace The Add Replace icon lets the user add a new strap table entry or replace an entry with modified data To create a new entry enter the table information in the Level and Volume fields and click Add Replace The system creates an entry with the information you entered To change an existing entry select the table entry from the list window and enter the new information in the Level and Volume fields Then click Add Replace The system replaces the entry with the revised data 120 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Delete The Delete icon allows the user delete strap table entries Select the entry and click Delete The system removes the strap table entry from the list box Import The Import icon allows the user import a strap table from a file The import file must exist in the correct format with a TST or CSV extension The TST files are used by FuelsManager To import a strap table 1 Click Import The Open dialog appears Open es Look in VewRTU ex CjBMPS Gs i Jotits
297. te 8203 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module Valid values are 2400 4800 and 9600 The default is 9600 ComParams Defines the number of data bits and the parity used by the com port Valid values include 8N 8 data bits No parity 80 8 data bits Odd parity 8E 8 data bits Even parity 7O 7 data bits Odd parity7E 7 data bits Even parity The default is 8N ID Ronan System Modbus Address cTankNumber Tank Number in the Ronan System LevelConvert Determines the units in which the level data will be displayed F Feet m millimeters Default is I TempConvert Determines the units in which the temperature data will be displayed F Fahrenheit C Celsius If no value is specified no conversion will be performed The default is F TempDeadband The TempDeadband is used to set the Change Of State deadband for temperature The default is 25 degrees LevelDeadband The LevelDeadband sets the deadband for the Change of State mode The default is 0 001 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Level Temp Position changes Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables automatic notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is High Varec Inc 155 Remote Terminal Unit Config Parameters Function Maxti
298. te Terminal Unit CONFIGURATION PASSWORD Enter Password Figure 8 13 Configuration Password Dialog Modify Password The user can use the Modify Password function to protect all Tank Gauge Configuration files by issuing and changing a password Creating a Password 1 2 Select Config and click Password The Change Password dialog appears In the New Password edit box enter the password If no password currently exists leave the Old Password field blank In the Retype New Password edit box confirm the entry by reentering the password Click OK CHANGE PASSWORD Old Password New Password Betype New Password Figure 8 14 Change Password Dialog Note Make sure that you write down the password and store it in a secure place Changing the Password 1 d U N Select Config and click Modify Change Password The Change Password dialog appears as illustrated in creating a password In the Old Password edit box enter the current password In the New Password edit box enter the new password In the Retype New Password edit box confirm the entry by reentering the new password Click OK Note Make sure that you write down the password and store it in a secure place Varec Inc 109 Using ViewRTU The Communications Menu C3 ViewRTU Test rcf Bax File Point Config Communications Options Help PC Setup Status
299. ter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the watchdog task on the Motherboard The watchdog task monitors the MBTX point on the Model 8310 and verifies it is scanning for gauges If the Model 8203 fails the 0x4000 and the 0x0001 bits of the PntStatus will be set to indicate the failure Dynamic Parameters Function Command MBTX Command Valid values are Calibrate Calibrate the MSTX Cancel Cancel 4000 ATT only Clear Mods Clear Modifications 4000 ATT only Enc Battery Off Turn off Encode Battery 4000 ATT only Restart Restart MSTX 4000 ATT only Save to EEPROM Save the MSTX database to EEPROM 4000 ATT only Level Floating point value representing the tank level Floating point Register 0 The Level will be presented in decimal feet Temp Floating point value representing the tank temperature Floating point Register 1 The Temperature will be presented in Fahrenheit RTDI Floating point value representing the RTD resistance represented in Ohms Floating point Register 2 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function AlarmStatus Integer value indicating the Alarm Status Integer Register 5 Values are 0x0001 Critica
300. that has changed is reported to the Host Change of State Related Parameters In order to support the Change of State method many points have additional configuration parameters included Parameter Description Value One of the parameters which will be returned to a Change of State request by the Host Most Software Blocks are designed so that the Value parameter is the main parameter of interest Report Is used for Change of State processing only Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value Changes State Valid values are High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High have higher priority than points with Report Low 42 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Parameter Description Maxtime Is used for Change of State processing only Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request When the Maxtime period expires the Value is forced to appear as if it has changed even if is has not ensuring that data is sent to the host periodically Setting Maxtime to 0 disables this option The maximum is 255 seconds Deadband Affects the Change of State processing It allows users to filter out insignificant LevelDeadband changes freeing the communications link to send other data TempDeadband
301. the 8130 RTU Motherboard COM 1 is set to Modbus Master then the MIREG point Module parameter must be set to O to indicate the Motherboard and not a Model 8203 and the Chan parameter must be set to 1 The Modbus Master protocol handler sequential processes the MIREG and MFPREG points issuing data requests according to the ID Addr and Size parameters The MSCAN point simply reports the activity of the Modbus Master protocol handler giving information about the current request and total number of requests and errors The NumRequests parameter gives the total number of requests attempted while the NumTrans gives the number of completed transactions The ID represent the current device address being scanned The Pnt parameter is the Tag of the point being scanned Varec Inc 127 128 Installation and Operations Manual 8203 Rosemount RAPTOR RTG RAPTOR The Rosemont RAPTOR RTG RAPTOR Radar Gauge point provides an interface to Rosemont RAPTOR Radar Gauges The RAPTOR point interfaces to Saab 3900 Series RAPTORs using Modbus If communicating directly to the gauge the RAPTOR point executes on the Model 8212 Saab TRL 2 Interface The RAPTOR point can also be used with a Saab FCU Parameters The database parameters used by the RAPTOR point are listed and described below Config Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII ch
302. the case of time varying signals The PressValue needs to be Normal in order for the pump to continue to operate If using a DI point set the Value O and Value 1 parameters to Normal and Alarm respectively If an analog signal is used to measure pressure then use an interposing AISTAT point to define valid operating conditions The PUMP point can be configured to operate based upon achieving a flow total by specifying a TotalRef In this case the operator sets the FlowSetPoint and issues a pump Start command The PUMP point will then issue a Reset command to the TotalRef start the pump and allow it to run until the FlowTotal equals the FlowSetPoint The PUMP point has a mode where the operation is controlled based upon the pump runtime The user sets the TimeTostop and the pump will run until the period expires This mode can be used independently or in conjunction with the FlowSetPoint The AlarmStatus and AlarmControl are available as outputs to other types of points such asa DAL point The AlarmStatus and AlarmControl parameters can be used by the DAL point to activate an output to indicate and alarm condition exists The PUMP point is one of the most sophisticated Software Blocks in the 8130 RTU It can interact with several other points in order to construct a complex control strategy Varec Inc 83 8130 RTU Software Blocks Scaler Point SCALER The Generic Scaling point allows the user to perform math functions i
303. therboard determines that the Model 8203 has stopped updating Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Varec Inc 99 Application The DAU point provides an interface to Saab Data Acquisition Units DAU using two methods Directly to the TRL 2 bus using a Model 8212 Via an FCU using a Model 8203 Model 8212 TRL 2 Interface The Model 8212 provides the means to connect directly to the TRL 2 bus The Model 8212 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8212 set to address 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used to communicate with the Saab DAU Model 8203 Dual RS 485 Interface If the Data Acquisition Units are connected to a Saab FCU then a Model 8203 is used to read data The Model 8203 is automatically detected at startup and an MSCAN point is automatically created to manage the scanning task The Module and Chan determine which Module and Channel are used for communications to the slave device Module 1 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 1 Module 2 corresponds to the Model 8203 set to address 2 etc The Chan parameter must match the channel used t
304. tive interaction all field data scanning is coordinated by the real time clock Digital Inputs are scanned at a rate of 20 msec while Analog Inputs are scanned at a 160 msec rate Both analog and digital field data are held in temporary storage for later processing by an input task Automatic Fault Recovery The 8130 RTU has a watchdog timer that is periodically strobed by the microprocessor Should the processor suffer a lapse due to hardware or software failure the watchdog timer will time out and all Outputs will be disabled The 8130 RTU will then be reset and normal operation will resume Varec Inc 9 Hardware and Software Firmware The 8130 RTU firmware is implemented using Flash RAM technology The firmware can be updated via the Host communications interface This capability allows for future field installation of product enhancements As new features are released the user can download new firmware using the ViewRTU program without having to replace PROMS Refer to Chapter 7 Using ViewRTU for a description of the firmware download feature Communications There are four communications tasks one for each of the four communication channels COM ports 0 through 3 are used to interface to external devices or host systems Refer to Chapter 4 for the location of these ports COMO COM 015 an RS 232 port normally used in diagnostic testing or local programming COM 1 and COM2 COM 1 and 2 can be configured for comm
305. to change from higher or lower alarm states the alarm trip point minus the RefValue must be greater than the Hysteresis parameter This means that the RefValue must be within the range defined as normal by the amount equal to the Varec Inc 47 8130 RTU Software Blocks Hysteresis Setting the Hysteresis value to 0 returns the status to Normal whenever the RefValue is within normal range The Control parameter can be used to disable alarm processing When the Control parameter is set to Enable alarm processing is enabled If Control is Disable then the Value is set to Normal and no alarm processing is done The ControlRef parameter may be used to automatically update the Control parameter based upon another software block The following example graph illustrates the use of the RefValue LoLo Low High HiHi Holdoff and Hysteresis parameters Holdoff Holdoff 1 I Hysteresis Ss RefValue nigh o Figure 6 3 Application of the AAL point 1 The RefValue goes into the Hi range but does not pass the Holdoff parameter The alarm is held off 2 The RefValue remains in the Hi range longer than the defined Holdoff parameter The alarm state is then set to High 3 The RefValue dips into the normal range but the amount does not equal or exceed the Hys teresis parameter 4 The RefValue returns to the normal range but this time the amount exceeds the Hysteresis parameter The status returns
306. to display use the ViewRTU Internal Diagnostics DIAG 00 software block Configuring Update Mode Before you can set the LDI to Update Mode you must configure the ViewRTU Internal Diagnostics DIAG 00 software block to reflect the data you want to show To configure the LDI to continuously display points use ViewRTU to do the following Using ViewRTU to continuously display points 1l Double right click on the Internal diagnostics DIAG 0O icon The Edit Point dialog box appears Varec Inc 159 Local Diagnostic Interface POINT t Point Help Curent Point 0 Point Desc DIAG 00 Diagnostics Local Display 1 Local Diag 2 Update 3 Tank 1 E English D Decimal E Display 1 DDA 00 Level Display Reference2 DDA 00 Temp Display Reference3 Undefined Display Reference4 Undefined Display Reference5 Undefined Display Undefined Display Reference Undefined Display Reference8 Undefined Diagnostic Command Undefined Diagnostic Command Data 0 Diagnostic Command Data Diagnostic Command Data Diagnostic Command Data Unit Temperature Deg 57 800003 Power Consumption mA 182 600006 Field Power Consumption 0 0 Minimize Next Examine Download Connections Previous Exit Upload Figure 10 13 Edit Point Dialog 2 Double click on a PntRef row The Modify Reference dialog box appears p MODIFY REFERENCE
307. to which the gauge will calculate level and temperature Valid values are Minimum Level to 0 1 inch and Temperature to 1 0 degree resolution Normal Level to 0 01 inch and Temperature to 0 2 degree resolution Maximum Level to 0 001 inch and Temperature to 0 02 degree resolution The default is Normal WaitResp This is a floating point number which scales the time period calculated for the MG5000 gauge to respond after performing level and temperature calculations If the gauge is slow in performing calculations and responding this value can be incremented to avoid time outs The default is 1 0 which represents 10096 TempDeadband Change of state temperature deadband value If the temperature changes by a value greater than or equal to the TempDeadband a Change of State occurs and the host is automatically notified If the temperature change is less than the TempDeadband then no Change of State occurs The TempDeadband does not effect the Temp value read only the automatic notification to the Host system The default is 0 25 LevelDeadband Change of state level deadband value If the level changes by a value greater than or equal to the LevelDeadband a Change of State occurs and the host is automatically notified If the level change is less than the LevelDeadband then no Change of State occurs The LevelDeadband does not effect the Level value read only the automatic notification to the Host system The default is O Repo
308. ts are gallons per hour gph Value Last Leak test rate in gallons per hour gph Last Stop Time of last test StatusFlag Tank Status A field with different flags that correspond to tank alarms Consult X76CTM manual for data PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 Gauge is offline 0x0002 Data is invalid 0x0004 Command Timeout 0x8000 Gauge did not response to last request pre fail Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Application The X76CTM point provides an interface to Ronan X76CTM Continuous Tank Monitor The Ronan system is connected directly to a 8303 Dual RS 485 Communications Interface Module The ID must match the unit address of the X76CTM The Baud Rate must match the Baud Rate of the interface The individual tank data address is entered in the cTankValue field Conversion from Metric to English or vice versa can be performed be setting the LevelConvert and the TempConvert parameters Installation and Operations Manual 8 Using ViewRTU This chapter describes the software used to configure the 8130 RTU This chapter describes each of the menus found in the menu bar Additionally the chapter describes the system requirements and the installation procedure Use this chapter in accordance with the 8130 RTU Software Blocks section ViewRTU software a Microsoft Windows application is designed to conf
309. ttom Commands the gauge to find and follow the tank bottom Bottom Density Commands the gauge to perform a measurement of the bottom density Download Writes data from the WriteData parameter to the matrix location specified by the Page VPos and HPos parameters Mid In Level Commands the gauge to find and follow the middle interface level Middle Density Commands the gauge to perform a measurement of the middle density Follow Level Commands the gauge to find and follow the product interface level Raise Causes the servo to raise Reset Performs a power up reset of the gauge Stop Stops the servo from raising or lowering Applaud Reads data from the matrix location specified by the Page VPos and HPos parameters and displays the data in the ReplyData parameter Upper Int Level Commands the gauge to find and follow the water interface level Upper Density Commands the gauge to perform a measurement of the upper density Group When reading writing matrix items the Group parameter determines the Matrix page VPos When reading writing matrix items the VPos parameter determines the vertical matrix position or Mode number HPos When reading writing matrix items the HPos parameter determines the horizontal matrix position or Item number WriteData The data used in issuing a Download Command is retrieved form the WriteData parameter ReplyData The reply data from issuing an Upload Command is stored
310. tus Temp status parameter blocked This parameter indicates the blocked status of each temperature sensor 0x0001 Temp 1 blocked 0x0002 Temp 2 blocked 0x0004 Temp 3 blocked 0x0008 Temp 4 blocked 0x0010 Temp 5 blocked 0x0020 Temp 6 blocked 0x0040 Temp 7 blocked 0x0080 Temp 8 blocked 0x0100 Temp 9 blocked 0x0200 Temp 10 blocked 0x0400 Temp 11 blocked 0x0800 Temp 12 blocked 0x1000 Temp 13 blocked 0x2000 Temp 14 blocked 0x4000 Legal NMI temperature 0x8000 NMI approved DAU TempDiagCode Temp diagnostic code parameter This parameter indicates the error status of each temperature sensor 0x0001 Temp 1 error 0x0002 Temp 2 error 0x0004 Temp 3 error 0x0008 Temp 4 error 0x0010 Temp 5 error 0x0020 Temp 6 error 0x0040 Temp 7 error 0x0080 Temp 8 error 0x0100 Temp 9 error 0x0200 Temp 10 error 0x0400 Temp 11 error 0x0800 Temp 12 error 0x1000 Temp 13 error 0x2000 Temp 14 error 0x4000 Master set if using an FCU and DAU does not respond 0x8000 Temp average error No temperature sensor is in liquid AvgTemp Floating point value representing the average tank temperature This value is the average of all sensors below the liquid level PntStatus Integer HEX value indicating status of point Values are 0x0001 DAU Not Responding 0x0010 No response set if using an FCU and DAU does not respond 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8203 This bit is set if the Watchdog task on the Mo
311. unications to Host systems using a variety of protocols For COM 1 and 2 the communication interfaces include the following RS 485 for use in multi drop configurations RS 232 for flexibility in configuring other types of communications links such as radio and fiber optic interfaces RTS CTS lines are available for hardware handshaking COMS COM 3 the fourth COM port is used for parallel processor communications These communications are used when an intelligent module such as the Model 8203 or 8210 has been attached to the motherboard Refer to the individual intelligent module manuals for more information Protocols The 8130 RTU is fully compatible with FuelsManager software It is also compatible with a variety of other Host systems including through Modbus protocols Several types of protocols are available for assignment to the communication ports As seen in the table below most of the devices can be assigned interchangeably as the Master or Slave Master Slave 8130 with the 8203 8208 8130 RTU with FuelsManager or 8210 8211 8212 8213 8214 ViewRTU 8215 8216 or 8217 TIWAY Modbus Modbus For example if FuelsManager is used with the 8130 RTU then FuelsManager is the master and the 8130 RTU is the slave The 8130 is the master when intelligent I O expansion modules are used The default communication settings for the COM ports are as follows 10 Installati
312. units for the temperature data F Fahrenheit C Celsius The TempUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Temp can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the TempConvert parameter in the appropriate VISCAN or RKSCN point DensityUnits Specifies the engineering units for the density data K kg m3 A API L Ibs cu ft The DensityUnits needs to match the units specified during the gauge setup The Density can be converted from Metric to English or vice versa by setting the DensityConvert parameter in the appropriate V1SCAN or RKSCN point LevelDeadband The LevelDeadband sets the deadband for the Change of State mode The default is 0 TempDeadband The TempDeadband is used to set the Change of State deadband for the temperature The default is 25 degrees FastScanMode Places the SG6000 point in the Fast Scan mode Values are Enable or Disable BaudRate Model 8203 The default is 19200 Model 8213 Sets the V1 protocol pulse width If the ClockRate is set to 00 then the pulse width is approx 303 uS 1 3300 BPS The default is 99 Filter Determines how many samples must be within a deadband specified by the LevelFilter before the Level is accepted Used only on the Model 8213 Values can be 0 7 LevelFilter In conjunction with the Filter determines the reasonableness of the Level value Data is stored in a temporary buffer The nu
313. ure 9 15 Options Menu Export AII The Export All option allows the user to export the entire tank gauge Configurator database Each point type is exported to a file in the CSV file format The user must create and then select the subdirectory for the export operation The exported data can be edited using a spreadsheet program such as Microsoft Excel or a database program like Microsoft Access Many programs can read and write data in the CSV file format You can make backups of your TCF file by exporting the data in the CSV file format The exported data can be read back with the Import All option The Spreadsheet Mode also has an option to import CSV file data Export All Select the drive and directory c fuelsmanager fmproject rtu Directory Files STRAP csv Figure 9 16 Download 8130 RTU Firmware Dialog Import All The Import All option allows the user to import all of the Tank Gauge s database information from a file Each point type must have been exported previously in order to import data This can be accomplished using the Export All option or by point type using the Spreadsheet Mode The data is read from files in the CSV file format For example all of the Unit points are imported from the file UNIT CSV The user must select the subdirectory to import the data from The CSV file data can also be imported using the Spreadsheet mode 140 Installation and Operations M
314. us of the temperature elements Register 1B For example Bit 0 1 means Temp 1 is in Error For further explanation see the REX documentation Temp Floating point value representing the average temperature of the product The data is returned in the format specified during the configuration of the gauge Varec Inc 137 Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 0x0001 No Response from device 0x0002 Device Error Reg2 Bit7 0x0004 Device Warning Reg2 Bit1 0x0008 0x0010 No Response from RTG or DAU when using FCU for Comm 0x0020 Invalid Level Reg2 Bit15 Inverse 0x0040 Invalid Avg Temperature Register27 Bit15 Not Supported in the RTG 0x0080 0x0100 Analog Error Reg2 Bit4 Reg29 BitO 0x0200 Analog2 Error Reg2 Bit5 or Reg29 Bit2 0x0400 Hart Slavel Error Reg2 Bit6 or Reg42 BitO Not Supported in the RTG 0x1000 W amp M Seal is Enabled 0x2000 0x4000 Module Failure 0x8000 Elapse Time of the last scan PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters WMCheckSum Weights and Measures Checksum This parameter is calculated when the WMSeal parameter is set to enable The RAPTOR point provides an interface to Rosemont Radar Tank Gauges RAPTOR using the TRL 2 bus using the Model 8212 TRL 2 Interface Model 8212 TRL 2 Interface The Model 8212
315. ust be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 65535 seconds The default is 600 Watchdog Enables the Motherboard watchdog task for the DAU point The watchdog task monitors the DAU point and verifies it is scanning for devices If the DAU point stops execution the PntStatus will be set to 0x4000 to indicate a failure Dynamic Parameters Function 1 14 Floating point value representing the temperature of each temp sensor configured TempFilter Temp in Liquid parameter Bits O 13 indicate if Temp sensors 1 14 are submerged in liquid Bit 14 indicates a System Error Bit 15 indicates a Temp calibration error 0x0001 Temp 1 is in Liquid 0x0002 Temp 2 is in Liquid 0x0004 Temp 3 is in Liquid 0x0008 Temp 4 is in Liquid 0x0010 Temp 5 is in Liquid 0x0020 Temp 6 is in Liquid 0x0040 Temp 7 is in Liquid 0x0080 Temp 8 is in Liquid 0x0100 Temp 9 is in Liquid 0x0200 Temp 10 is in Liquid 0x0400 Temp 11 is in Liquid 0x0800 Temp 12 is in Liquid 0x1000 Temp 13 is in Liquid 0x2000 Temp 14 is in Liquid 0x4000 System Error 0x8000 Temp Calibration error 98 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit Dynamic Parameters Function TempSta
316. vailable in the 8130 RTU associated with tank gauge communications including Software Blocks for every major tank gauge manufacturer Gathering Point Data For Host to 8130 RTU communications there are two primary methods for gathering point data These methods are listed below Standard Request Response Format The Host issues scan requests and the 8130 RTU responds with the data The Scan method has the advantage of being deterministic the response time to a particular request will always be the same This method has the limitation that if there are many points defined in the 8130 it often takes several requests to obtain all of the data Most of the time data has not changed since the last request so this results in inefficiencies in update times This situation is often the case in systems where there are many digital points that do not change frequently Change of State Format The Host issues scan requests based on a Change of State basis Some systems refer to this as Event Mode The 8130 RTU keeps track of the items that have changed since the last Host request The Host can issue a single request of tell me what has changed since my last request The 8130 RTU will respond with the results which include addressing information about the data In a typical system this results in a significant improvement in the throughput rate for data The Change of State method has the advantage of being very efficient only the data
317. vel Floating point value representing the Bottom Water level AmbientTemp Outside Air Temperature Device Status TM4590 Internal Status See the TM4590 documentation for more information Analog 4 to 20 mA value 6 VaporTemp Air Gas Temperature Value Digital Inputs Value GaugeStatus Coded value indicating status of the gauge The GaugeStatus can have the following values Upper Int Level Searching or following the upper interface level Mid Int Level Searching or following the middle interface level Bottom Searching or following the bottom Following Level Displacer is following product level Calibration Act Automatic gauge calibration is in progress Bottom Density Measuring the Bottom Density Middle Density Measuring the Middle Density Upper Density Measuring the Upper Density Raising The displacer is raising Stopped The displacer is stopped Rel Over Tens The displacer cable tension has exceeded the maximum value CustodyMode Weights amp Measures Status Elapse Time of last scan Interval Amount of time in HR MIN SEC between scans of the gauge Varec Inc 111 Dynamic Parameters Function PntStatus Byte value indicating status of point Values are 8203 amp 8213 0x0000 No Error 0x0001 No Response from Device 0x0002 Data Invalid 0x1000 W amp M Seal is enabled 0x4000 Failure of the Model 8203 or Model 8213 This bit is set if the Watchdog task
318. with Auto Increment 1 Click on each desired cell or column 150 Installation and Operations Manual Remote Terminal Unit 2 Select Set Value from the Edit menu The following dialog box appears LevelHiHi TankNumbe TankLabel Tank 1 MODIFY VALUE t3 UnitNum Unit Number fi Auto Increment Store Cancel Figure 9 30 Spreadsheet Mode Editing Point Parameter Values using Auto Increment 3 Each value in the column is incremented by one for the range of rows selected All cells that are selected and match the data type of the value are set to the value The Options Menu SPREADSHEET MODE Point Edit Options Import Cri4M TankNumbe TankLabel LevelHiHi Export View Ctrl V Hide Row Col Ctl H 2 zo ee 3 Tank3 24 0 4 Figure 9 31 Spreadsheet Mode The Options Menu Import The Import option allows the user to import a point or group of points that match the current point type The imported file is named according to the point type with the CSV file extension Export The Export option allows the user to export a selected point or all the points that match the current point type to the default 8130 RTU directory The export file is saved in a file named according to the point type with the CSV file extension Note The user is able to change the source directory in the ViewRTU INI fil
319. x it will be ignored The default value is 200 PntRef1 8 Input point reference for the SIGSEL point to monitor The SIGSEL point interfaces to floating point data values LevelRef If defined the LevelRef is an input point reference used to enable or disable the use of the Valuel 8 data associated with PntRef1 8 Levell 8 are used to define the level for PntRef1 8 Level1 8 Level1 8 are constants used with the LevelRef to qualify the use of the Value1 8 when calculating the Minimum Maximum and Average value Varec Inc 85 8130 RTU Software Blocks Configuration Parameters Function Deadband Change of State Deadband The default value is 0 2 Report Causes automatic notification to the Host in response to a Change of State Request when the Value changes State Parameter value can be High Low or No Report No disables notification Points with Report High will be sent before points with Report Low The default is No Maxtime Specifies the maximum time in secs between automatic Change of State data being sent to the Host in response to a Change of State Request Report must be set to either Low or High for the Value parameter to be sent in response to a Change of State Request A value of 0 disables this option Non zero values cause responses to be sent even if the value has not changed since the last message The maximum is 255 seconds The default is 60 Dy
320. y kilobytes NOVRAMSize Size of installed system nonvolatile database memory kilobytes Varec Inc 87 8130 RTU Software Blocks Dynamic Parameters Function FlashSize Size of installed system program memory kilobytes PntCheckSum CRC 16 Checksum for point s static Configuration Parameters Event Timer Counter TIMER Event Timer Counter point provides counting and timing functions The TIMER point has four timers Each timer counts events of a reference point to a user specified comparator The TIMER point is useful for counting pump and valve operations Parameters The database parameters used by the TIMER point are listed and described below Configuration Parameters Function Tag A Tag can contain 15 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Tags can be used to identify points indicating the use of the point such as Pump Cycles or Valve Ops The default tag is set to TIMER 0O Description The point description can contain 30 bytes of data and can include any printable ASCII character Descriptions can be used as information relevant to any aspect of the point such as its use location operating information etc The default description is set to TIMER OO PntRef Point reference for timing and counting functions Any point which produces a coded data type can be used CompareO CompareO0 specifies the v
321. your application The information in this instruction manual is not all inclusive and does not and cannot take into account all unique situations Consequently the user should review this product literature in view of his or her application If you have any further questions please contact Varec for assistance Limitations of Seller s Liability In the event that a court holds that this instruction manual created some new warranties Seller s liability shall be limited to repair or replacement under the standard warranty clause In no case shall the Seller s liability exceed that stated as Limitations of Remedy in the contract between the Seller and Buyer Use of parts that are not manufactured or supplied by Varec voids any warranty and relieves Varec of any obligation to service the product under warranty Varec recommends the use of only Varec manufactured or supplied parts to maintain or service the 8201 RTU Terms of Use The information provided in this document is provided as is without warranty of any kind Varec Inc disclaim all warranties either express or implied including the warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose In no event shall Varec Inc or its suppliers be liable for any damages whatsoever including direct indirect incidental consequential loss of business profits or special damages even if Varec Inc or its suppliers have been advised of the possibility of such damages This manual is

4 - Varec, Inc.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents